Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 220

3-059-594-12 (1)

Digital
Video Camera
Recorder
Operating Instructions
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,
and retain it for future reference.


epe cyaae aapaa ae pe,
, ae pyc cxpae e
aex cpa.

TM

SERIES

DCR-TRV20E

DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E/TRV20E
2000 Sony Corporation

English

Welcome!

Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony


Digital Handycam camcorder. With your Digital
Handycam, you can capture lifes precious
moments with superior picture and sound
quality.
Your Digital Handycam is loaded with advanced
features, but at the same time it is very easy to
use. You will soon be producing home video that
you can enjoy for years to come.


Digital Handycam Sony.
Digital
Handycam

.
Digital Handycam

,
.
,
.

WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose
the unit to rain or moisture.

To avoid electrical shock, do not open the


cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel only.

NOTICE ON THE SUPPLIED AC POWER


ADAPTOR FOR CUSTOMERS IN THE
UNITED KINGDOM


.


.

A moulded plug complying with BS1363 is fitted


to this equipment for your safety and
convenience.
Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to
be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA
or BSI to BS1362 (i.e., marked with
or
mark) must be used.
If the plug supplied with this equipment has a
detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the
fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never
use the plug without the fuse cover. If you
should lose the fuse cover, please contact
your nearest Sony service station.

ATTENTION
The electromagnetic fields at the specific
frequencies may influence the picture and sound
of this digital camcorder.

For the customers in Germany

Directive: EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.


92/31/EEC
This equipment complies with the EMC
regulations when used under the following
circumstances:
Residential area
Business district
Light-industry district
(This equipment complies with the EMC
standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)



,
.

English

Table of contents
Checking supplied accessories .............................. 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................. 6
Getting started
Using this manual .................................................. 10
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ................... 13
Installing the battery pack ........................... 13
Charging the battery pack ........................... 14
Connecting to the mains .............................. 19
Step 2 Inserting a cassette .................................... 20
Recording Basics
Recording a picture ............................................... 21
Shooting backlit subjects (BACK LIGHT) ... 30
Shooting in the dark
(NightShot/Super NightShot) ..................... 31
Checking the recording END SEARCH /
EDITSEARCH / Rec Review ............................... 34
Playback Basics
Playing back a tape ................................................ 36
Viewing the recording on TV .............................. 41
Advanced Recording Operations
Recording a still image on a tape
Tape Photo recording ...................................... 45
Adjusting the white balance manually ............... 49
Using the wide mode ............................................ 51
Using the fader function ....................................... 53
Using special effects Picture effect ................... 56
Using special effects Digital effect ................... 58
Using the PROGRAM AE function ..................... 61
Adjusting the exposure manually ....................... 64
Focusing manually ................................................ 65
Advanced Playback Operations
Playing back a tape with picture effects ............. 67
Playing back a tape with digital effects .............. 68
Enlarging images recorded on tapes
PB ZOOM .......................................................... 70
Quickly locating a scene using the zero set
memory function ................................................ 72
Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by
title Title search ................................................ 73
Searching a recording by date Date search ..... 75
Searching for a photo
Photo search/Photo scan ................................ 77
Editing
Dubbing a tape ....................................................... 80
Dubbing only desired scenes
Digital program editing .................................. 84

Using with analog video unit and PC


Signal convert function ................................... 96
Recording video or TV programmes .................. 97
Inserting a scene a from VCR
Insert editing .................................................. 101
Audio dubbing ..................................................... 104
Superimposing a title .......................................... 108
Making your own titles ....................................... 112
Labelling a cassette .............................................. 114
Customizing Your Camcorder
Changing the menu settings .............................. 116
Resetting the date and time ................................ 129
Memory Stick operation
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)
Using a Memory Stickintroduction .......... 131
Recording still images on Memory Sticks
Memory Photo recording ............................. 138
Superimposing a still picture in a
Memory Stick on a moving picture
MEMORY MIX ............................................... 144
Recording an image from a mini DV tape as
a still image ........................................................ 149
Copying still images from a mini DV tape
Photo save ....................................................... 152
Viewing a still picture
Memory photo playback ............................... 154
Copying the image recorded on
Memory Sticks to mini DV tapes ................ 158
Enlarging still images recorded on
Memory Sticks Memory PB ZOOM ........ 160
Playing back images in a continuous loop
SLIDE SHOW ................................................. 162
Preventing accidental erasure
Image protection ............................................ 164
Deleting images ................................................... 166
Writing a print mark PRINT MARK ............. 169
Additional Information
Usable cassettes .................................................... 171
About i.LINK ........................................................ 174
Troubleshooting ................................................... 176
Self-diagnosis display ......................................... 182
Warning indicators and messages .................... 183
Using your camcorder abroad ........................... 194
Maintenance information and precautions ...... 195
Specifications ........................................................ 200
Quick Reference
Identifying the parts and controls ..................... 204
Quick Function Guide ......................................... 216
Index ...................................................................... 218

pepa paaex paece ........ 5


Pyc cpy aycy ................. 8
a cyaa
cae a pyca ...............
y 1 a ca a ..........
caa aape a ...................
apa aape a ......................
ceee cee pee ...........
y 2 caa acce ..............................
ac - Oce e
ac pae ...........................................
Cea e c ae ce
(BACK LIGHT) ..............................................
Cea ee (Ha cea/
ye ce) .....................
pepa ac END SEARCH/
EDITSEARCH/ pcp ac ........................

10
13
13
14
19
20
21
30
31
34

Bcpeee - Oce e
Bcpeee e .................................... 36
pcp ac a pae eepa .......... 41
cepecae epa ce
ac e pae a ee
cea a ey ....................................
Peypa aaca e pyy ..............
cae ppa pea .......
cae y eepa ....................
cae ceax e
e pae ..................................
cae ceax e
p e ........................................
cae y PROGRAM AE ...........
Peypa c pyy .....................
ycpa pyy ........................................
cepecae epa
cpee
Bcpeee e c ea
pae .....................................................
Bcpeee e c p
ea .......................................................
eee pae, acax a
eax PB ZOOM .........................................
cp c a c y
a ye e .................................
c pa ac a ee py
c pa ....................................................
c ac ae c a .................
c c/capae ....

45
49
51
53
56
58
61
64
65

67
68
70
72
73
75
77

Ma
epeac e ............................................... 80
epeac yx
p a ppa ..................... 84
cae c aa
eycpca
y pepaa caa ............... 96

ac e eeppa ....................... 97
Bcaa a c eaa
Ma ca .......................................... 101
Ayepeac .............................................. 104
Haee pa .............................................. 108
Cae Bax ccex p ............ 112
Mappa acce ........................................ 114
Bee yax yca a
eaepe
eee yca e ............................. 116
epeycaa a pee ...................... 129
Oepa c Memory Stick
(T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
cae Memory Stick Beee .... 131
ac ex pae a Memory
Stick ac pa a .......... 138
Haee e pae
Memory Stick a e paee
MEMORY MIX ............................................... 144
ac pae c e DV a
e pae ......................... 149
pae ex pae c
e DV
Cxpaee a c .......... 152
pcp e pae
Bcpeee c
a ........................................................ 154
pae pae, acax
Memory Stick, a e DV ............... 158
eee ex pae,
acax a Memory Stick
a PB ZOOM ........................................ 160
Bcpeee pae epep
ceaec ayy y
ecpa ca ............................... 162
pepaee cya cpa
aa pae .................................. 164
aee pae .................................... 166
ac eax a PRINT MARK ........ 169
ea pa
cyee acce ....................................
O aee i.LINK .................................................
c ycpaee ecpace ..............
a caac ...........................
peypeae ap
ce ....................................................
cae Bae eaep
a pae .....................................................
pa yxy a aapa ep
pecpc .........................................
Texece xapaepc ..........................

171
174
185
191
192
194
195
202

pa cpa
Oaee ace peyp ................ 204
pae pyc y ................ 217
Aa yaae .................................... 219

Checking supplied
accessories

pepa paaex
paece

Make sure that the following accessories are


supplied with your camcorder.

eec, ceye paec


paac Bae eaepe
2

or/
RMT-812

RMT-809
3

DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E

0 DCR-TRV20E

RMT-811
4

qa

qs

Getting started a cyaa

or/

or/

1 Wireless Remote Commander (1) (p. 212)


RMT-809: DCR-TRV6E
RMT-812: DCR-TRV11E
RMT-811: DCR-TRV20E
2 R6 (size AA) battery for Remote
Commander (2) (p. 213)
3 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC power adaptor (1),
Mains lead (1) (p. 14)
4 NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (p. 13, 14)
5 PC serial cable (1) (p. 157)
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only
6 Memory Stick (1) (p. 131)
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only
7 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 41, 80)
8 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 208)
9 21-pin adaptor (1) (p. 42)
0 Lens cap (1) (p. 21)
qa Application software: PictureGear 4.1Lite
(CD ROM) (1) (p. 157)
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only
qs Lens hood (1) (p. 26)
DCR-TRV20E only

1 ecp y ca
ypae (1) (cp. 212)
RMT-809: DCR-TRV6E
RMT-812: DCR-TRV11E
RMT-811: DCR-TRV20E
2 aapea R6 (paepa AA) ya
ca ypae (2) (cp. 213)
3 Cee aaep epee a
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC (1), p
epa (1) (cp. 14)
4 aape NP-FM50 (1) (cp. 13, 14)
5 ae ceae epeca
(1) (cp. 157)
T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
6 Memory Stick (1) (cp. 131)
T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
7 Cee ae ay/e (1)
(cp. 41, 80)
8 ee pee (1) (cp. 208)
9 21-p aaep (1) (cp. 42)
0 pa ea (1) (cp. 21)
qa pae ppae eceee:
PictureGear 4.1Lite (CD ROM) (1) (cp. 157)
T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
qs ea ea (1) (cp. 26)
e DCR-TRV20E

English

Quick Start Guide

This chapter introduces you to the basic features of your


camcorder. See the page in parentheses ( ) for more
information.

Connecting the mains lead

(p. 19)

Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 13).
Open the DC IN
jack cover.

Quick Start Guide

Connect the plug with


its v mark facing lens
side.

AC power adaptor (supplied)

Inserting a cassette (p. 20)


1 Slide OPEN/EJECT in
the direction of the
arrow and open the
lid.

2 Push the middle


portion of the back of
the cassette to insert.

3 Close the cassette


compartment by
pressing the
mark on the cassette
compartment.

EJECT

4 After the cassette


compartment going
down completely,
close the lid until it
clicks.

Recording a picture
1 Remove the lens cap.

(p. 21)

2 Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while


pressing the small green button.
VCR
OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAMERA

4 Press START/STOP. Your camcorder


starts recording. To stop recording, press
START/STOP again.

3 To open the LCD


Viewfinder
When the LCD panel is closed, use the
viewfinder placing your eye against its eyecup.

Monitoring the playback picture on the LCD


screen (p. 36)
1 Set the POWER switch to VCR

2 Press m to rewind the tape.


REW

VCR
OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAMERA

(DCR-TRV20E)/
PLAYER (DCRTRV6E/
TRV11E) while
pressing the
small green
button.

Quick Start Guide

panel, press OPEN.


The picture appears
on the LCD screen.

3 Press N to start playback.


PLAY

NOTE
Do not pick up your camcorder by
holding the viewfinder or the LCD
panel.

Pycc

Pyc cpy aycy

B a ae pee ce y Bae
eaep. ee py pa c. a
cpae pyx cax ( ).

ceee pa epa (cp. 19)


p ca eaep e ee cye aape
(cp. 13).
Ope py
ea DC IN.
Pyc cpy aycy

cee eep
a, ea v
a apaea
cpy ea.
Cee aaep epee a (paaec)

caa acce (cp. 20)


1 epee
epeae
OPEN/EJECT
apae
cpe pe
py.

2 ca
accey, ae a
ee epy c
ae cp.

3 ape acce
ce, aa ey
a acce
cee.

4 ce , a
acce ce
c ycc
, ape
py ea.

ac pae (cp. 21)


2 Haa aey eey y,

1 Ce py ea.

ycae epeae POWER


ee CAMERA.
VCR
OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAMERA

4 Hae y START/STOP. Baa


eaepa ae ac.
ca ac ae y
START/ STOP ee pa.

p ae
. Ha pae
c
paee.

Bcae
Ec ae apa, cyec
caee, yp.

p cp pae a
pae (cp. 36)
1 Haa aey eey

2 Hae y m
ycpe epe e.
VCR

REW
OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAMERA

y, ycae
epeae
POWER
ee VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/
PLAYER (DCRTRV6E/TRV11E).

Pyc cpy aycy

3 Hae OPEN,

3 Hae y N aaa
cpee.

PLAY

PMEAHE
He ae eaepy a
cae ae .

Getting started

a cyaa

Using this manual

cae a pyca

The instructions in this manual are for the three


models listed in the table below. Before you start
reading this manual and operating your
camcorder, check the model number by looking
at the bottom of your camcorder. The
DCR-TRV20E is the model used for illustration
purposes. Otherwise, the model name is
indicated in the illustrations. Any differences in
operation are clearly indicated in the text, for
example, DCR-TRV20E only.
As you read through this manual, buttons and
settings on your camcorder are shown in capital
letters.
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a
beep sound to indicate that the operation is being
carried out.

cpy a pyce
peaae pex ee,
epecex ae e. epe e,
a pec ae pyc aa
cyaa Bae eaep,
pepe ep e a e cpe
eaep. B aece cpa
cyec e DCR-TRV20E. B pyx
cyax ep e yaa a pcyax.
ae- pacxe cyaa
e yaa ece, apep,
e DCR-TRV20E.
p e a pyca yae,
yca a eaepe
aa aa ya.
pep. cae epeae POWER
ee CAMERA.
p e epa a eaepe
B cee yca yep ca,
epa ee epa.

Types of differences/T pa
DCRMEMORY mark*
(on the POWER
switch)
Mea MEMORY*
(a epeaee
POWER)
DV IN/OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO

10

TRV6E

TRV11E

TRV20E

z**
z**

z**
z**

z
z

z Provided
Not provided

z eec
Ocycye

* The model with MEMORY marked on the


POWER switch is provided with memory
functions. See page 131 for details.
**Output only.

* B ex c e MEMORY a
epeaee POWER ec y
a. pe cee pee a
cp. 131.
**T x.

Using this manual


Note on Cassette Memory

The functions which depend on whether the tape


has the cassette memory or not are:
End search (p. 34, 40)
Searching a recording by date date search
(p. 75)
Photo search (p. 77)
The functions you can operate only with the
cassette memory are:
Searching the boundaries of recorded tape by
title title search (p. 73)
Superimposing a title (p. 108)
Making your own titles (p. 112)
Labelling a cassette (p. 114)
For details, see page 171.
You see this mark in the introduction of
the features that operate only with
cassette memory.
Tapes with cassette memory are marked by
(Cassette Memory).

peae acce
a
Baa eaepa paae pae DV.
B ee ca eaep
acce DV. Peeyec
ca ey c acce a
.
He pee y, pe ac
, eec a ee accea
a e:
c a (cp. 34, 40)
c ac ae c a
(cp. 75)
c (cp. 77)
y, p B ee ypa
c acce a,
ceye:
c pa ac a ee py
c pa (cp. 73)
Haee pa (cp. 108)
Cae Bax ccex p
(cp. 112)
Mappa acce (cp. 114)
pe cee pee a cp. 171.

Getting started a cyaa

Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You


can only use mini DV cassettes with your
camcorder. We recommend you to use a tape
with cassette memory
.

cae a
pyca

B ee ye y ey p
ca y, p
ypa c
acce a.
e c acce a appyc c
e
(accea a).

11

cae a
pyca

Using this manual


Note on TV colour systems
TV colour systems differ from country to
country. To view your recordings on a TV, you
need a PAL system-based TV.

Copyright precautions
Television programmes, films, video tapes, and
other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials may
be contrary to the provision of the copyright
laws.

Precautions on camcorder care


The LCD screen and the viewfinder are
manufactured using high-precision
technology. However, there may be some
tiny black points and/or bright points (red,
blue, green, or white) that constantly appear
on the LCD screen and in the viewfinder.
These points occur normally in the
manufacturing process and do not affect the
recorded picture in any way. Effective ratio
of pixels and/or screen are 99.99% or more.
Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your
camcorder away from rain and sea water.
Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your
camcorder to malfunction. Sometimes this
malfunction cannot be repaired [a].
Never leave your camcorder exposed to
temperatures above 60C (140F), such as in a
car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight
[b].
Do not place your camcorder so as to point the
viewfinder or the LCD screen toward the sun.
The inside of the viewfinder or LCD screen may
be damaged [c].

[a]

12

[b]

Contents of the recording cannot be


compensated if recording or playback is not
made due to a malfunction of the camcorder,
video tape, etc.




.

,
PAL.


, ,

.


.




.
Oa a pae e
caee y c epe
pe (pace, ce, eee
ee).


. 99,99%

.
,
.
.
,
,
[a].

60 (140F), ,
,
[b].

,
.

[c].

[c]


,
-
,
..

Step 1 Preparing the


power supply
Installing the battery pack

y 1 a
ca a
caa aape a
cae aape ,
ca eaepy e ee.

(1) Lift up the viewfinder.


(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.

(1) e cae.
(2) epee aape
ea.

1
2

To remove the battery pack


(1) Lift up the viewfinder.
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of
the arrow while pressing BATT down.

c aape a

Getting started a cyaa

Install the battery pack to use your camcorder


outdoors.

(1) e cae.
(2) epee aape
apae cpe, aa y BATT
.

1
2
BATT

BATT release
lever/Pa
ce
BATT

2
After installing the battery pack
Do not carry your camcorder by holding the
battery pack. If you do so, the battery pack may
slide off your camcorder unintentionally,
damaging your camcorder.

ce yca aape a
He epece c eaepy a
aape . B cyae aape
e ep ccy c
Bae eaep pe ee.

If you use the large capacity battery pack


If you install the NP-FM70/FM90/FM91 battery
pack on your camcorder, extend its viewfinder.
Take care not to pinch your finger when lifting
the viewfinder up and down.

p ca aape a
ec
p ycae aape a NP-FM70/
FM90/FM91 Bay eaepy e
cae. ye cp, e
pe a p a
yca cae.

13

Step 1 Preparing the power


supply

y 1 a ca
a

Charging the battery pack

apa aape a

Use the battery pack after charging it for your


camcorder.
Your camcorder operates only with the
InfoLITHIUM battery pack (M series).

cye aape Bae


eaep ce e ap.
Baa eaepa paae c
aape InfoLITHIUM (cep M).

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover, pulling the cover


out a little and rotating. Connect the AC
power adaptor supplied with your camcorder
to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the
plugs v mark facing the lens side.
(2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power
adaptor.
(3) Connect the mains lead to the mains.
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
Charging begins. The remaining battery time
is indicated in minutes on the display
window.
When the remaining battery indicator changes to
, normal charge is completed. To fully charge
the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack
attached for about one hour after normal charge
is completed until FULL appears in the display
window. Fully charging the battery allows you to
use the battery longer than usual.

(1) Ope py ea DC IN, y ee


a ce e epy. cee
cee aaep epee a,
paae eaepe, ey DC
IN Bae eaep a, ea v
a eepe a apaea cpy
ea.
(2) cee p epa
ceey aaepy epee a.
(3) cee p epa
cee pee.
(4) cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG). Haec apa.
B e ce ye paac
pe caec apa yax.
Ec ap caec apa
ec a
, a,
paa apa aepea.
ap aape a (a apa)
cae aape e
pe a ac ce
aepe pa ap ex p,
a e ce e c
a FULL. a apa aape
a e Ba ca
aape e, e .

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

14

CAMERA

y 1 a ca
a

After charging the battery pack

ce ap aape a

Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC


IN jack on your camcorder.

Ocee cee aaep epee


a ea DC IN a Bae eaepe.

Notes
Prevent metallic objects from coming into
contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of
the AC power adaptor. This may cause a shortcircuit, damaging the AC power adaptor.
Keep the battery pack dry.
When the battery pack is not to be used for a
long time, charge the battery pack once fully
and then use it until it fully discharges again.
Keep the battery pack in a cool place.

pea
He ycae aa eaecx
pee c eaec ac
eepa c a cee
aaepa. e pec py
aa pee Bae
eaep.
epe aape cyx
cc.
a aape e cyec
eee e peya pee,
c ape e, a ae
cye, a e papc
ae. pae aape
pxa ece.

Remaining battery time indicator


The remaining battery time you record with the
viewfinder is displayed.
The remaining battery time indicator in the
display window roughly indicates the recording
time with the viewfinder.
Until your camcorder calculates the actual
remaining battery time
min appears in the display window.
While charging the battery pack, no indicator
appears or the indicator flashes in the display
window in the following cases:
The battery pack is not installed correctly.
The AC power adaptor is disconnected.
Something is wrong with the battery pack.
Battery pack
The battery pack is charged a little before it
leaves the factory.

ap caec apa
aape a
Opaaec caeec pe pa
aape p cee c caee.
ap pee caec apa
aape a e ce
pe yaae pe ac c
cae cae.

Getting started a cyaa

Step 1 Preparing the power


supply

ex p, a Baa eaepa e
pee ecee pe
caec apa aape a
B e ce ye paac
a min.
B pe ap aape a
e ce e ye paac
ap ye a
ceyx cyax:
aape ycae epa.
Ocee cee aaep epee
a.
Hecpac aape a.
aape
Ha pep-ee aape
epe pa ac apaec.

15

Step 1 Preparing the power


supply

y 1 a ca
a

Charging time/Bpe ap
Battery pack/
Full charge (Normal charge)/
aape
a apa (paa apa)
NP-FM50 (supplied)/
150 (90)
(x e)
NP-FM70
240 (180)
NP-FM90
330 (270)
NP-FM91
360 (300)

Approximate number of minutes to charge an


empty battery pack

pee pe yax p

aape a

Recording time/Bpe ac
DCR-TRV6E

Battery pack/

NP-FM50 (supplied)/
(x e)
NP-FM70
NP-FM90
NP-FM91

Recording with
the viewfinder/
ac c
cae
Continuous*/
Typical**/
Hepep Ta**
pe*

Recording with
the LCD screen/
ac c
paa
Continuous*/
Typical**/
Hepep Ta**
pe*

200 (180)

110 (95)

145 (130)

75 (70)

415 (375)
630 (565)
725 (655)

225 (205)
345 (310)
395 (360)

305 (270)
460 (410)
535 (480)

165 (145)
250 (225)
290 (260)

DCR-TRV11E

Battery pack/
aape

NP-FM50(supplied)/
(x e)
NP-FM70
NP-FM90
NP-FM91

Recording with
the viewfinder/
ac c
cae
Continuous*/
Typical**/
Hepep Ta**
pe*

Recording with
the LCD screen/
ac c
paa
Continuous*/
Typical**/
Hepep Ta**
pe*

195 (175)

105 (95)

140 (125)

75 (65)

400 (360)
600 (540)
695 (625)

220 (195)
330 (295)
380 (340)

295 (265)
450 (400)
520 (465)

160 (145)
245 (220)
285 (255)

DCR-TRV20E

Battery pack/
aape

16

NP-FM50(supplied)/
(x e)
NP-FM70
NP-FM90
NP-FM91

Recording with
the viewfinder/
ac c
cae
Continuous*/
Typical**/
Hepep Ta**
pe*

Recording with
the LCD screen/
ac c
paa
Continuous*/
Typical**/
Hepep Ta**
pe*

135 (120)

80 (70)

110 (100)

65 (60)

285 (255)
435 (390)
505 (455)

170 (150)
260 (230)
300 (270)

230 (210)
355 (315)
410 (370)

135 (125)
210 (185)
245 (220)

Step 1 Preparing the power


supply

y 1 a ca
a

Approximate number of minutes when you use a


fully charged battery

pee pe yax p
ca c ape
aape a
p cax ( ) yaa pe p
ca aape a c
pa ap.
* pee pe epep
ac p eepaype 25C (77F). p
ca eaep xx
ycx cp cy aape a
cpaaec.
** pee pe yax p
ac c epa yc/
ca ac, pacae
ee/ee a.
aec cp cy aape
a e pe.

Playing time/Bpe cpee


DCR-TRV6E
Battery pack/
aape
NP-FM50 (supplied)/
(x e)
NP-FM70
NP-FM90
NP-FM91

Getting started a cyaa

Numbers in parentheses ( ) indicate the time


using a normally charged battery.
* Approximate continuous recording time at
25C (77F). The battery life will be shorter if
you use your camcorder in a cold
environment.
** Approximate number of minutes when
recording while you repeat recording start/
stop, zooming and turning the power on/off.
The actual battery life may be shorter.

Playing time
Playing time
on LCD screen/
with LCD closed/
Bpe cpee Bpe cpee
a pae
p ap
145 (130)

200 (180)

305 (270)
460 (410)
535 (480)

415 (375)
630 (565)
725 (655)

DCR-TRV11E
Battery pack/
aape
NP-FM50 (supplied)/
(x e)
NP-FM70
NP-FM90
NP-FM91

Playing time
Playing time
on LCD screen/
with LCD closed/
Bpe cpee Bpe cpee
a pae
p ap
140 (125)

195 (175)

295 (265)
450 (400)
520 (465)

400 (360)
600 (540)
695 (625)

17

Step 1 Preparing the power


supply

y 1 a ca
a

DCR-TRV20E
Battery pack/
aape

Playing time
Playing time
on LCD screen/
with LCD closed/
Bpe cpee Bpe cpee
a pae
p ap

NP-FM50 (supplied)/
(x e)
NP-FM70
NP-FM90
NP-FM91

125 (110)

160 (145)

265 (235)
400 (360)
465 (415)

335 (300)
505 (455)
585 (525)

Approximate number of minutes when you use a


fully charged battery
Numbers in parentheses ( ) indicate the time
using a normally charged battery. The battery life
will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a
cold environment.

What is InfoLITHIUM?
The InfoLITHIUM is a lithium ion battery pack
which can exchange data such as battery
consumption with compatible electronic
equipment. This unit is compatible with the
InfoLITHIUM battery pack (M series). Your
camcorder operates only with the
InfoLITHIUM battery. InfoLITHIUM M
series battery packs have the
mark.
InfoLITHIUM is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
TM

SERIES

pee pe yax p
ca c ape
aape a
p cax ( ) yaa pe p
ca aape a c
pa ap. p ca
eaep xx ycx cp
cy aape a cpaaec.
ae InfoLITHIUM?
InfoLITHIUM pecae c e aape , p e
eac a, a a
peee ep aape a, c
cec eaapayp.
ycpc cec c aape
InfoLITHIUM (cep M). Baa eaepa
paae c aape
InfoLITHIUM. Ha aapex ax
InfoLITHIUM cep M eec ea
.
InfoLITHIUM ec p ap
ppa Sony.
TM

SERIES

18

Step 1 Preparing the power


supply
Connecting to the mains

(1) Open the DC IN jack cover, pulling the cover


out a little and rotating it. Connect the AC
power adaptor supplied with your camcorder
to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the
plugs v mark facing the lens side.
(2) Connect the mains lead to the AC power
adaptor.
(3) Connect the mains lead to the mains.

PRECAUTION
The set is not disconnected from the AC power
source (the mains) as long as it is connected to
the mains, even if the set itself has been turned
off.
Notes
The AC power adaptor can supply power even
if the battery pack is attached to your
camcorder.
The DC IN jack has source priority. This
means that the battery pack cannot supply any
power if the mains lead is connected to the DC
IN jack, even when the mains lead is not
plugged into the mains.
Using a car battery
Use Sony DC Adaptor/Charger (not supplied).

ceee cee pee


Ec B cpaeec ca
eaepy ee pe,
peeyec ca ae
epec ce c cee
aaepa epee a.
(1) Ope py ea DC IN, y ee
a ce e epy. cee
cee aaep epee a,
paae eaepe, ey DC
IN Bae eaep a, ea v
a eepe a apaea cpy
ea.
(2) cee p epa
ceey aaepy epee a.
(3) cee p epa
cee pee.

2, 3

Getting started a cyaa

When you use your camcorder for a long time,


we recommend that you power it from the mains
using the AC power adaptor.

y 1 a ca
a

PEOCTEPEEHE
Aapa e aec ca
epee a ex p, a
cee epec ce, ae
ec ca aapa e.
pea
ae cee aaepa epee
a e aac ae cyae,
ec aape ppee Bae
eaepe.
e DC IN aae ppe
ca. aae, ae
aape a e aec, a
p epa cee
ey DC IN, ae ec p
epa e e ceey
pey.
cae a
ayypa
cye aaep/ape ycpc
c a p Sony (e x
e).

19

Step 2 Inserting a
cassette

y 2 caa
acce

(1) Install the power source.


(2) Slide OPEN/EJECT in the direction of the
arrow and open the lid. The cassette
compartment automatically lifts up and
opens.
(3) Push the middle portion of the back of the
cassette to insert. Insert the cassette in a
straight line deeply into the cassette
compartment with the window facing out.
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing
the
mark on the cassette compartment.
The cassette compartment automatically goes
down.
(5) After the cassette compartment going down
completely, close the lid until it clicks.

(1) cae c a.
(2) epee epeae OPEN/EJECT
apae cpe pe
py. acce ce aaec
ec epx pec.
(3) ca accey, ae a ee
epy c ae cp. Bcae
accey p acce ce
ypa, pae
apyy.
(4) ape acce ce, aa ey
a acce cee. acce
ce aaec ycc .
(5) ce , a acce ce
c ycc , ape
py ea.

3, 4

OPEN/EJECT
4

To eject a cassette

ee acce

Follow the procedure above and in step 3, take


out the cassette.

Be yaay e peypy
e accey ye 3.

Notes
Do not press the cassette compartment down.
Doing so may cause malfunction.
The cassette compartment may not be closed
when you press any part of the lid other than
the
mark.

pea
He aae acce ce .
e pec ecpac.
acce ce e e apc, ec
B aee a ay- pyy ac a
pe, a e a ey
.

When you use mini DV cassette with cassette


memory
Read the instruction about cassette memory to
use this function properly (p. 171).

p ca acce DV c
acce a
pe cpy acce a
pa ca
y (cp. 171).

To prevent accidental erasure


Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to
expose the red mark.

20

pepae cya cpa


epee eec a ac a
accee a, ac paca ea.

Recording Basics

ac - Oce e

Recording a picture

ac pae

Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.

Baa eaepa e ycpy


aaec.
(1) Ce py ea, aa e
a ee pe, ppee
py ea pe axaa.
(2) cae c a cae
accey. pe cee pee
ye 1 ye 2 (cp. c 13 20).
(3) Haa aey eey y,
ycae epeae POWER
ee CAMERA. Baa eaepa
ye ycaea pe a.
(4) Hae OPEN, p ae
. Bcae c
aaec.
(5) Hae y START/STOP. Baa
eaepa ae ac. c
ap REC. apc ae
aa ac, pacea a
epee ae eaep.
ca ac ae y START/
STOP ee pa.

LOCK Switch/

LOCK

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

(1) Remove the lens cap by pressing both knobs


on its sides and attatch the lens cap to the grip
strap.
(2) Install the power source and insert a cassette.
See Step 1 and Step 2 for more
information (p. 13 to p. 20).
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while
pressing the small green button. Your
camcorder is set to the standby mode.
(4) To open the LCD panel, press OPEN. The
viewfinder automatically turns off.
(5) Press START/STOP. Your camcorder starts
recording. The REC indicator appears. The
camera recording lamp located on the front of
your camcorder lights up. To stop recording,
press START/STOP again.

VCR
OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAMERA

4
Camera recording lamp/
aa ac
eaep

40min

REC

0:00:01

Microphone/Mp

21

Recording a picture

ac pae

Note
Fasten the grip strap firmly.

peae
Hae ppee pee axaa.

Note on recording mode


Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP
(standard play) mode and in the LP (long play)
mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings. In the
LP mode, you can record 1.5 times as long as in
the SP mode.
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your
camcorder, we recommend playing the tape on
your camcorder.

peae pey ac
Baa eaepa e ac
cpeee pee SP (caape
cpeee) pee LP
(paee cpeee). Bepe
pe SP LP ycaax e. B
pee LP B ee ac 1,5
paa e pee, e pee SP.
Ec ac e ac a Bae
eaepe pee LP, ee peeyec
cp a eaepe.

Note on the LOCK switch (DCR-TRV11E/


TRV20E only)
When you slide LOCK to the right, the POWER
switch can no longer be set to MEMORY
accidentally. LOCK is set to the left before your
camcorder leaves the factory.
To enable smooth transition
Transition between the last scene you recorded
and the next scene is smooth as long as you do
not eject the cassette even if you turn off your
camcorder.
However, check the following:
Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and ones
in the LP mode on one tape.
When you change the battery pack, set the
POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
When you use a tape with cassette memory,
however, you can make the transition smooth
even after ejecting the cassette if you use the
END SEARCH function (p. 34).
If you leave your camcorder in the standby
mode for five minutes while the cassette is
inserted
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is
to save battery power and to prevent battery and
tape wear. To resume the standby mode, set the
POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and to CAMERA
again.

22

peae epeae LOCK


( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
Ec epey epeae LOCK
pa, epeae POWER ye
e cya yca
ee MEMORY. epeae LOCK
ycae e a pepee epe pa eaep
py ce.
ecee a epexa
epex ey ce aca
cey ye
a ex p, a e eee
accey, ae p e eaep.
Oa ex e ceyee:
He ceye a ee ea ac
pee SP LP.
p aee aape a ycae
epeae POWER ee OFF
(CHG).
Oa p ca e c
acce a caa
a epex, ae ce ee
acce, ec cyec y END
SEARCH (cp. 34).
Ec B cae Bay eaepy
pee a a y p
cae accee
Baa eaepa c
aaec. pepaae pacx
apa aape a c
aape a e. paa
pe a ycae epeae
POWER ee OFF (CHG), a ae
ca ee CAMERA.

Recording a picture

When you record in the SP and LP modes on


one tape or you record some scenes in the LP
mode
The playback picture may be distorted or the
time code may not be written properly between
scenes.

Ec B ee ac peax SP
LP a y ey e acaee
ec pee LP
Bcpe paee e
cae pee epa
aca ey a.

The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees to the


viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens
side.
If you turn the LCD panel over so that it faces the
other way, the
indicator appears in the
viewfinder and on the LCD screen (Mirror
mode).

Peypa paa
ae e epeeac pep
a 90 payc cpy cae
pep a 180 payc cpy
ea.
Ec B epee ae a,
ye apaea pyy cpy,
caee a pae c
ap
(epa pe).

180

90

When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically


until it clicks, and swing it into the camcorder
body.

p ap ae ycae ee
epa ea, a ae ce ee,
cec c pyc eaep.

Note
When using the LCD screen except in the mirror
mode, the viewfinder automatically turns off.

peae
p ca paa
cae aaec aec,
pe epa pea.

When you use the LCD screen outdoors in


direct sunlight
The LCD screen may be difficult to see. If this
happens, we recommend that you use the
viewfinder.

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

Adjusting the LCD screen

Ec B cyee pa e
ee p ce
ce
B ye py pae -
a pae . B cyae
peeyec ca cae.

23

Recording a picture

Picture in the mirror mode


The picture on the LCD is a mirror-image.
However, the picture will be normal when
recorded.

paee epa pee


paee a pae ye
paac epa. Oa ac
pae ye pa.

During recording in the mirror mode


ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander does not work.

B pe ac epa pee
a ZERO SET MEMORY a ye
ca ypae e paae.

Indicators in the mirror mode


The STBY indicator appears as Xz and REC as
z. Some of the other indicators appear mirrorreversed and others are not displayed.

ap epa pee
ap STBY paaec e Xz, a
ap REC e z. Hepe pye
ap c epa
pae e, a epe x e
yy paac cce.

Adjusting the brightness of the


LCD screen

Peypa pc paa

To adjust the brightness of the LCD screen, press


either of the two buttons on LCD BRIGHT.

peyp pc paa
ae y a LCD BRIGHT.

LCD BRIGHT

to dim/ to brighten/
eee pe

LCD screen backlight


You can change the brightness of the backlight.
Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings.(p.116)
Even if you adjust the LCD screen backlight or
brightness of the LCD screen
The recorded picture will not be affected.

After recording
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).
(2) Close the LCD panel.
(3) Eject the cassette.

24

a cea paa
B ee e pc ae
ce. Bepe ay LCD B.L.
ycaax e. (cp. 116)
ae cyae peyp ae
ce paa pc
paa
e e a acae paee.

ce ac
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG).
(2) ape ae .
(3) ee accey.

Recording a picture
Adjusting the viewfinder

Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder


lens adjustment lever.

Peypa cae
Ec B yee aca pae p
ap ae , ppye
paee c cae.
Opeypye e cae
cec c c pee,
ap caee e
cycpa.
e cae pa
peyp ea cae.

Viewfinder backlight
You can change the brightness of the backlight.
Select VF B.L. in the menu settings. (p.116)

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed,


check the picture with the viewfinder. Adjust the
viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the
indicators in the viewfinder come into sharp
focus.

a cea cae
B ee e pc ae
ce. Bepe VF B.L. ycaax
e. (cp. 116)

25

Recording a picture
Attaching the supplied lens
hood (DCR-TRV20E only)
To record fine pictures under strong light, we
recommend attaching the lens hood. Also the
lens cap can be attached even with the lens hood
on.

Notes
When you use the Remote Commander and the
lens hood, the Remote Commander may not
function properly because the lens hood blocks
the infrared rays from the Remote Commander.
In such case, remove the lens hood from your
camcorder.
You cannot attach filters or other objects onto
the lens hood.
When you use the filter (not supplied)
The shadow of the lens hood may appear in the
corners of LCD screen or viewfinder.

26


ceee paae
e ea (
e DCR-TRV20E)
ac eae pae p p
cee peeyec ycaaa a
e ey. py ea
ca ae p cee
ee.

pea
p ca ya ca
ypae e ea y
e paa eppe, a a
ea pecye pxe
papacx ye ya. B
cyae cee ey
eaep.
ee e ce p
pye pcce.
a B cyee p (e
paaec)
Te e e c yax
paa cae.

Recording a picture

Using the zoom feature

cae y
paca
Cea epee pa pa
pacapa ee
paca. epee e ae
ycpe paca.
epee cae y aea
eceae aye peya.
Cpa T: ee (e
paec)
Cpa W: py a
(e yaec)

W
W

To use zoom greater than 10


Zoom greater than 10 is performed digitally, if
you set D ZOOM to 20 or 40 in the menu
settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF
at the factory. (p. 116)

The right side of the bar shows the


digital zooming zone.
The digital zooming zone appears
when you set D ZOOM to 20 or 40./
paa cpa c a pae
aae y p
paca.
a p paca
ec, a apaepe D
ZOOM ycaaaec aee
20 40.

T
W

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower


zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.
Using the zoom function sparingly results in
better-looking recordings.
T side: for telephoto (subject appears closer)
W side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther
away)

aee paca ee 10
Tpaca ee 10 ec
p e p ycae ae
20 40 apaepe D ZOOM
ycaax e. Ha pepee y p
paca ycaea ee OFF
(cp. 116)

27

Recording a picture

When you shoot close to a subject


If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power
zoom lever to the W side until the focus is
sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least
about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/8 inch) away from
the lens surface in the telephoto position, or
about 1 cm (about 1/2 inch) away in the wideangle position.

p cee ea c e
Ec B e ee y e
ycp, epee pa pa
pacapa cpy W ye
e ycp. B ee
cey ea e ee,
p c pae epe a
pacc 80 c epxc ea
1 c e py
a.

Notes on digital zoom


Digital zoom starts to function when zoom
exceeds 10.
The picture quality deteriorates as you move
the power zoom lever toward the T side.
You cannot use the digital zoom when the
POWER switch is set to MEMORY
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only).

28

pea p paca
pa paca aae
cpaaa, ec aee paca
peae10.
aec pae yxyaec epe
epeee paa pa
pacapa cpe T.
pa paca e ye paa,
ec epeae POWER ycae
ee MEMORY.
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E).

Recording a picture

Indicators displayed in the


recording mode

ap, paaee
pee ac

The indicators are not recorded on tapes.


[a]

ap e acac a ey.
[b]

[c]

40min

REC

0:00:01
45min

[e]
[f]

4 7 2000

12:05:56

[g]

[h]
[a] Remaining battery time indicator
[b] Cassette memory indicator
This appears when using a tape with cassette
memory.
[c] Recording mode indicator
[d] STBY/REC indicator
[e] Time code/Tape counter
[f] Remaining tape indicator
[g] Time indicator
The time is displayed about five seconds after
the power is turned on.
[h] Date indicator
The date is displayed about five seconds after
the power is turned on.

[a] ap caec apa


aape a
[b] ap acce a
ap ec p
ca acce a.
[c] ap pea ac
[d] ap STBY/REC
[e] pee/Ce e
[f] ap caec e
[g] ap pee
Bpe paaec ee
pe 5 cey ce
e a.
[h] ap a
aa paaec ee
pe 5 cey ce
e a.

Time code
The time code indicates the recording or
playback time, 0:00:00 (hours : minutes :
seconds) in CAMERA mode and 0:00:00:00
(hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER ( DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E) mode. You cannot rewrite only the time
code.

pee
pee yaae pe ac
cpee, 0:00:00 (ac : y :
cey) pee CAMERA 0:00:00:00
(ac : y : cey : ap) pee
VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER ( DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E). B e ee epeaca
pee.

Remaining tape indicator


The indicator may not be displayed accurately
depending on the tape.

ap caec e
ap e e paac
acc e.

Recording date and time


The recording date and time are not displayed
while recording. However, they are recorded
automatically onto the tape. To display the
recording date and time, press DATE CODE
during playback.

aa pe ac
p e ac aa pe e
paac. Oa aaec
acac a ey. pae
a pee ac pe
cpee ae DATE CODE.

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

[d]

29

Recording a picture
Shooting backlit subjects
(BACK LIGHT)
When you shoot a subject with the light source
behind the subject or a subject with a light
background, use the backlight function.
In the standby, recording or memory mode, press
BACK LIGHT.
The . indicator appears in the viewfinder or on
the LCD screen.
To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.


Cea e c ae
ce (BACK LIGHT)
Ec B ee cey ea c
c cea a e e
ea c ce , cye
y ae ce.
B pee a, ac
ae y BACK LIGHT.
Ha pae caee c
ap ..
e ae y BACK LIGHT
ee pa.

BACK LIGHT

If you press EXPOSURE when shooting backlit


subjects
The backlight function will be cancelled.

30

Ec aa y EXPOSURE p
e ce e c ae
ce
y ae ce ye eea.

Recording a picture

Shooting in the dark


(NightShot/Super NightShot)

In the standby, recording or memory mode, slide


NIGHTSHOT to ON. and NIGHTSHOT
indicators flash on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder. To cancel the NightShot function,
slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.

y ce e Ba
cey e ex ecax.
Hapep, B ee c ycex
cey x x ae
p ca a y.
B pee a, ac
epee epeae NIGHTSHOT
ee ON.
ap
NIGHTSHOT ay a a pae
caee. e y
ce epee epeae
NIGHTSHOT e OFF.

NIGHTSHOT
OFF

ON

SUPER
NIGHTSHOT

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

The NightShot function enables you to shoot a


subject in a dark place. For example, you can
satisfactorily record the environment of
nocturnal animals for observation when you use
this function.

Cea ee
(Ha cea/ye
ce)

NightShot Light emitter/


yae ce
ce

Using Super NightShot


The Super NightShot mode makes subjects more
than 16 times brighter than those recorded in the
NightShot mode.
(1) In the standby or recording mode, slide
NIGHTSHOT to ON.
indicator appears on
the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(2) Press SUPER NIGHTSHOT. The
indicator
and SUPER NIGHTSHOT appear.
To cancel the Super NightShot mode, press
SUPER NIGHTSHOT.

Using the NightShot Light


The picture will be clearer with the NightShot
Light on. To enable NightShot Light, set
N.S.LIGHT to ON in the menu settings (p. 116).

cae pea yye


ce
Pe yye ce e
cea e ee e ecaa
pa pe, e cyae, ec B yee
cey pee
ce.
(1) B pee a ac
epee epeae NIGHTSHOT
ee ON.
ap c
a pae caee.
(2) Hae y SUPER NIGHTSHOT.
c ap
ac SUPER
NIGHTSHOT.
xa pea yye
ce ae y SUPER
NIGHTSHOT.

cae ce
ce
paee cae pe, ec
y ce. e
y ce ycae
epeae N.S.LIGHT ee ON
ycaax e (cp. 116).

31

Recording a picture

Notes
Do not use the NightShot function in bright
places (ex. outdoors in the daytime). This may
cause your camcorder to malfunction.
When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in
normal recording, the picture may be recorded
in incorrect or unnatural colours.
If focusing is difficult with the autofocus mode
when using the NightShot function, focus
manually.

pea
He cye y ce
xp ceex ecax (apep, a
ye ee pe). e
pec pee Bae
eaep.
p yepa yca NIGHTSHOT
e ON p pa ac
paee e aca
epax eececex eax.
Ec py ycpy
aaec pee p ca
y ce, e ee
pyy.

While using the NightShot function, you


cannot use the following functions:
Exposure
PROGRAM AE
White balance
While using the Super NightShot Function
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
depending on the brightness. At that time, the
moving picture may be slow down.
While using the Super NightShot function,
you cannot use the following functions:
Exposure
PROGRAM AE
Fader
Digital effect
Memory mode (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)
NightShot Light
NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are
invisible. The maximum shooting distance using
the NightShot Light is about three m (10 feet).

p ca y
ce B e ee ca
ceye y:
c
PROGRAM AE
aac e
p ca y yye
ce
Cpc apa aaec eec
acc ceec. B pe
cpc pae e
aeea.
p ca y yye
ce e ca
ceye y:
c
PROGRAM AE
eep
p e
Pe a ( e DCRTRV11E/TRV20E)
cea ce
y ce ce c
papac y e.
Macae pacce ce p
ca ce ce
pa pep 3 .

32

Recording a picture
Self-timer recording
You can make a recording with the self-timer.
This mode is useful when you want to record
yourself.

ac aepy caayca
B ee ac aepy
caayca. pe ee
cyae, ec B xe ac
cce pae.
(1) Hae y SELFTIMER pee
(aep
a. ap
caayca) c a pae
caee.
(2) Hae y START/STOP.
Taep caayca ae pa
ce c 10 c yep ca. B
cee e cey pa cea
yep ca ye ya ae, a
ae aaec aec ac.

START/STOP

SELFTIMER

To stop the self-timer during


recording

ca aepa caayca
pe ac

Press START/STOP.
Use the Remote Commander for convenience.

Hae y START/STOP.
yca cye y
ca ypae.

To record still pictures using the selftimer


Press PHOTO in step 2 (p. 47).

To record still pictures on Memory


Sticks
Press SELFTIMER, then press PHOTO in the
memory mode (p. 143).

To cancel self-timer recording


Press SELFTIMER so that the
indicator
disappears from on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder while your camcorder is in the
standby mode.

Note
The self-timer recording mode is automatically
cancelled when:
Self-timer recording is finished.
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or
VCR(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E).

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

(1) Press SELFTIMER in the standby mode. The


(self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD
screen or in the viewfinder.
(2) Press START/STOP.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with
a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the
countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then
recording starts automatically.

ac ex
pae c aepa
caayca
Hae y PHOTO ye 2 (cp. 47).

ac ex
pae a Memory Sticks
Hae y SELFTIMER, ae ae
y PHOTO pee (cp. 143).

e ac aepy
caayca
Hae y SELFTIMER,
ap
ce c paa
cae e, a
eaepa axc pee a.
peae
Pe ac aepy caayca ye
aaec ee, cyax:
Oa ac aepy caayca.
epeae POWER ycae
ee OFF (CHG) VCR(DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).

33

Checking the recording pepa ac


END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec
Review

END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/
pcp ac

You can use these buttons to check the recorded


picture or shoot so that the transition between the
last recorded scene and the next scene you record
is smooth.

B ee ca
pep aca pae
ce, epex ey ce
aca cey
acae a.

EDITSEARCH

END SEARCH

END SEARCH
You can go to the end of the recorded section
after you record.

B ee a aca ac
e ce e ac.

Press END SEARCH in the standby mode.


The last five seconds of the recorded section are
played back and playback stops. You can
monitor the sound from the speaker or
headphones.

Hae y END SEARCH pee


a.
yy cpee cee
cey aca ac, cpeee
cac. B ee ppa
y epe aycecy ccey
e ee.

EDITSEARCH
You can search for the next recording start point.
Hold down the +/ 7 side of EDITSEARCH in
the standby mode. The recorded section is played
back.
+ : to go forward
7 : to go backward
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you
press START/STOP, re-recording begins from
the point you released EDITSEARCH. You
cannot monitor the sound.

34

END SEARCH

EDITSEARCH
B ee c aaa
ceye ac.
epe aa cpy +/ 7
EDITSEARCH pee a. ye
cpeea acaa ac.
+ : pe epe
7 : pe aa
Oyce y EDITSEARCH
ca cpee. Ec B
aee y START/STOP, aec
epeac c eca, e a yea
a EDITSEARCH. B e ee
ppa y.

Checking the recording


END SEARCH / EDITSEARCH / Rec
Review
Rec Review
You can check the last recorded section.

End search function


When you use a tape without cassette memory,
the end search function does not work once you
eject the cassette after you have recorded on the
tape. If you use a tape with cassette memory, the
end search function works even once you eject
the cassette.
If there is a blank portion in the recorded portion,
the end search function may not work correctly
(p. 171).

pcp ac
B ee pep ce
acay ac.
B pee a ea ae a
cpy 7 EDITSEARCH.
yy cpee cee ec
cey pa ac. B ee
ppa y epe aycecy
ccey e ee.
y ca a
Ec B cyee ey e acce
a, y ca a e ye
paa ce ee acce, a
py a ea ac. Ec B
cyee ey c acce a,
y ca a ye paa ae
ce ee acce.
Ec a aca ee eec
eaca yac, y ca
a e paa epa (cp.
171).

Recording Basics ac - Oce e

Press the 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily


in the standby mode.
The last few seconds of the selected section are
played back. You can monitor the sound from the
speaker or headphones.

pepa ac
END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/
pcp ac

35

Playback Basics

Bcpeee - Oce e

Playing back a tape

Bcpeee e

You can monitor the playback picture on the


LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can
monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder.
You can control playback using the Remote
Commander supplied with your camcorder.

B ee ppa cpe
paee a pae . Ec B apee
ae , cpe paee
ppa caee. B
ee ppa cpeee c
ya ca ypae,
paae eaepe.

(1) Install the power source and insert the


recorded tape.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)
/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) while
pressing the small green button. The video
control buttons light up.
(3) To open the LCD panel, press OPEN.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.
(5) Press N to start playback.
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two
buttons on VOLUME. The speaker on your
camcorder is silent when the LCD panel is
closed.

(1) cae c a cae


acay ey.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E) /PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E), aa aey
eey y. c a
ypae epaee.
(3) Hae OPEN, p ae .
(4) Hae y m ycpe
epe e.
(5) Hae y N aaa
cpee.
(6) peyp pc aae y
yx VOLUME. Ec ae
a eaepe apa, a e ye
paa.

OFF(CHG)

POWER

VCR

PLAY

REW

MEMORY

CAMERA

6
3

VOLUME

36

To stop playback

ca cpee

Press x.

Hae x.

When monitoring on the LCD screen


You can turn the LCD panel over and move it
back to the camcorder body with the LCD screen
facing out.

B pe p a pae
B ee epeepy ae ypae
c ee c pyc eaep, a
pa ye pae apyy.

Playing back a tape


To display the screen indicators
Display function

pae pax
ap
y a
Hae y DISPLAY a Bae
eaepe a ye ca
ypae, p paaec
eaepe.
Ha pae c ap.
, ap ce,
ae ee pa y DISPLAY.
DATA CODE

Using the data code function

cae y a a

Your camcorder automatically records not only


images on the tape but also the recording data
(date/time or various settings when recorded)
(Data code).

Baa eaepa aaec


acae a ey e pae,
ae ae ac (ay/pe
pae yca p ac) ( ax).

Press DATA CODE on your camcorder or the


Remote Commander in the playback mode.

Hae y DATA CODE a Bae


eaepe a ye ca
ypae pee cpee.

The display changes as follows:


date/time t various settings (SteadyShot, white
balance, gain, shutter speed, aperture value) t
no indicator

Date/time/
aa/pe

4 7 2000
12:05:56

[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[f]

SteadyShot OFF indicator


Exposure mode indicator
White balance
Gain indicator
Sutter speed indicator
Aperture value

a ye ec cey
pa:
aa/pe t pae yca (yca
cea, aac e, ycee, cpc
apa, ea apa) t e
a

Bcpeee - Oce e

DISPLAY

Playback Basics

Press DISPLAY on your camcorder or the


Remote Commander supplied with your
camcorder.
The indicators appear on the LCD screen.
To make the indicators disappear, press
DISPLAY again.

Bcpeee e

Various settings/
Pae yca

AUTO
50 AWB
F1.8
9dB

[a]
[b]
[c]
[d]
[e]
[f]

[a] ap yc
ce SteadyShot OFF
[b] ap pea c
[c] aac e
[d] ap yce
[e] ap cpc apa
[f] Bea apa

37

Playing back a tape

Bcpeee e

Not to display various settings


Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings
(p. 116).
The display changes as follows:
date/time t no indicator

, e paac
pae yca
cae ay DATA CODE
ee DATE ycaax e
(cp. 116).
a ye ec cey
pa:
aa/pe t e a

Recording data
Recording data is your camcorders information
when you have recorded. In the recording mode,
the recording data will not be displayed.
When you use data code function, bars (-- -- --)
appear if:
A blank section of the tape is being played back.
The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or
noise.
The tape was recorded by a camcorder without
the date and time set.
Data code
The data code is displayed on the TV screen if
you connect your camcorder to the TV (p. 37).

acae ae
acae ae c pae
ac, e Bae eaep.
B pee ac ae paac e
yy.
p ca y a ax
c c (-- -- --) ec:
Bcpc eaca yac a
ee.
ea ec eae -a
pee ex.
ac a ey a ea
eaep e yca a
pee.
ax
ax ye paac a pae
eepa, ec B cee
eaepy eepy (cp. 37).

38

Playing back a tape


Various playback modes
To operate control buttons, set the POWER
switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCRTRV6E/TRV11E).

To view a still picture (playback


pause)

epeee pe
cpee
ca ypae
ycae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).

pcpa e
pae (aya cpee)

Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal


playback, press N.

ycpe epe e
epe

To rewind the tape

B pee ca ae y M.
e
cpee ae y N.

Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal


playback, press N.

To change the playback direction


Press
on the Remote Commander during
playback to reverse the playback direction. To
resume normal playback, press N .

To locate a scene monitoring the


picture (picture search)
Keep pressing m or M during playback. To
resume normal playback, release the button.

ycpe epe e
aa
B pee ca ae y m.
e
cpee ae y N.

ee apae
cpee
Hae y
a ye ca
ypae pe cpee
ee apae cpee.
e
cpee ae y N.

To monitor the high-speed picture


while advancing or rewinding the
tape (skip scan)

ca a pe
p pae (c
pae)

Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while


advancing the tape. To resume rewinding or
advancing, release the button.

epe aa y m M
pe cpee. epexa
y cpee yce y.

To view the picture at slow speed


(slow playback)

p pae a
c cpc pe
ycpe epe e epe
aa (c e pa)

Press y on the Remote Commander during


playback. For slow playback in the reverse
direction, press
, then press y on the Remote
Commander. To resume normal playback, press
N.

Bcpeee - Oce e

To advance the tape

B pe cpee ae y
X. e
cpee ae y X N.

Playback Basics

Press X during playback. To resume playback,


press X or N.

Bcpeee e

epe aa y m pe
ycpe epe e aa
y M pe ycpe epe
e epe. e
epe e epe aa yce
y.

pcpa cpee
pae a aee
cpc (aeee
cpeee)
Hae y y a ye ca
ypae pe cpee.
aee cpee pa
apae ae y , a ae
ae y y a ye ca
ypae. e
cpee ae y N.

39

Playing back a tape

To view the picture at double speed

pcpa cpee
pae a ye cpc

Press 2 on the Remote Commander during


playback. For double speed playback in the
reverse direction, press , then press 2 on the
Remote Commander. To resume normal
playback, press N.

To view the picture frame-by-frame


Press C on the Remote Commander in the
playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame
playback in the reverse direction, press c. To
resume normal playback, press N.

To search the last scene recorded


(END SEARCH)
Press END SEARCH in the stop mode. The last
five seconds of the recorded section are played
back and stops.
End Search function
When you use a tape without cassette memory,
the end search function does not work once you
eject the cassette after you have recorded on the
tape. If you use a tape with cassette memory, the
end search function works even once you eject
the cassette.
In the various playback modes
Sound is muted.
The previous picture may remain as a mosaic
image during playback.
When the playback pause mode lasts for five
minutes
Your camcorder automatically enters the stop
mode. To resume playback, press N.
Slow playback
The slow playback can be performed smoothly
on your camcorder; however, this function does
not work for an output signal from the DV IN/
OUT jack (DCR-TRV20E) or DV OUT jack
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
When you play back a tape in reverse
Horizontal noise appears at the centre or top and
bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction.

40

Hae y 2 a ye ca
ypae pe cpee.
cpee a ye cpc
,a
pa apae ae y
ae ae y 2 a ye
ca ypae.
e cpee
ae y N.

ap pcpa
cpee pae
Hae y C a ye
ca ypae pee ay
cpee. ap
cpee pa apae
ae y c. e
cpee ae y
N.

ca cee aca
a (END SEARCH)
Hae y END SEARCH pee
ca. yy cpee cee
cey aca ac,
cpeee cac.
y ca a
Ec B cyee ey e acce
a, y ca a e ye
paa ce ee acce, a
py a ea ac. Ec B
cyee ey c acce a,
y ca a ye paa ae
ce ee acce.
B epeex peax cpee
y ye pye.
B pe cpee peyee
paee e cac aec.
Ec pe ay p cpee
c y
Baa eaepa aaec e
pe ca. e
cpee ae y
N.
aeee cpeee
Ha Bae eaepe
ae aeee cpeee;
a a y e paae epe
x ca ea DV IN/OUT
(DCR-TRV20E) ea DV OUT (DCRTRV6E/TRV11E).
p cpee e pa
apae
Ha pae y c pae
ex epy e epxy y
paa. Oa e ec
ecpac.

Connect your camcorder to your TV or VCR with


the A/V connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder to watch the playback picture on the
TV screen. You can operate the playback control
buttons in the same way as when you monitor
playback pictures on the LCD screen. When
monitoring the playback picture on the TV
screen, we recommend that you power your
camcorder from the mains using the AC power
adaptor (p. 19). Refer to the operating
instructions of your TV or VCR.

cee Bay eaepy


eepy eay c
cee ae ay/
e, p paaec
eaepe pcpa
cp pae a pae
eepa. B ee ca
ypae cpeee a e
cc, a p ypae
cp paee a pae
. p ypae cp
paee a pae eepa
peeyec ae Bae
eaepe cee pe c
cee aaepa epee a
Opaec cpy cyaa
Bae eepa eaa
(cp. 19).

Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to


the TV using the A/V connecting cable. Then, set
the TV/VCR selector on the TV to VCR.

Ope py ea. cee


Bay eaepy eepy c
cee ae ay/e. ae,
ycae epeae TV/VCR a Bae
eepe ee VCR.

S VIDEO

IN
S VIDEO
AUDIO/VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO

Bcpeee - Oce e

pcp ac a
pae eepa

Playback Basics

Viewing the recording


on TV

: Signal flow/epeaa caa

If your TV is already connected


to a VCR
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on
the VCR by using the A/V connecting cable
supplied with your camcorder. Set the input
selector on the VCR to LINE.

Ec Ba eep ye
cee
eay
cee Bay eaepy xy
ey LINE IN a eae c
cee ae ay/
e, p paaec
eaepe. cae ceep x
caa a eae ee
LINE.

41

Viewing the recording on TV


If your TV or VCR is a monaural
type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting
cable to the video input jack and the white or the
red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or
the TV. If you connect the white plug, the sound
is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the
sound is R (right) signal.

If your TV/VCR has a 21-pin


connector (EUROCONNECTOR)
Use the 21-pin adaptor supplied with your
camcorder.

pcp ac a pae
eepa
Ec Ba eep
ea
ec a
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
xy ey ecaa, a e
pac eep xy ey
aycaa a eae
eepe. p cee e
eepa, B ye ca aaa L
(e). p cee pac
eepa, B ye ca aaa R
(pa).

Ec Bae eepe/
eae eec
21-p pae
(EUROCONNECTOR)
cye 21-p aaep,
paae Bae eaepe.

TV

If your TV or VCR has an S video jack


Connect using an S video cable (not supplied) to
obtain high-quality pictures. With this
connection, you do not need to connect the
yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting cable.
Connect the S video cable (not supplied) to the S
video jacks on both your camcorder and the TV
or the VCR.
This connection produces higher quality DV
format pictures.

42

Ec Bae eepe
eae eec e S
e.
Be ceee c ae S
e (e paaec) ye
caece pae. p
a cee Ba e y a
e (e) eep cee
ae ay/e.cee ae S
e (e paaec) ea S e a
eaepe eepe
eae.
p a cee B cee
y caecee pae
paa DV.

Viewing the recording on TV


Using the AV cordless IR
receiver
Once you connect the AV cordless IR receiver
(not supplied) to your TV or VCR, you can easily
view the picture on your TV. For details, refer to
the operating instructions of the AV cordless IR
receiver.

pcp ac a pae
eepa

SUPER LASER LINK

Insert a tape into your camcorder


(1) After connecting your TV and AV cordless IR
receiver, set the POWER switch on the AV
cordless IR receiver to ON.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/
PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(3) Turn the TV on and set the TV/VCR selector
on the TV to VCR.
(4) Press SUPER LASER LINK. The lamp of
SUPER LASER LINK lights up.
(5) Press N on your camcorder to start playback.
(6) Point the super laser link emitter at the AV
cordless IR receiver. Adjust the position of
your camcorder and the AV cordless IR
receiver to obtain clear playback pictures.

To cancel the super laser link


function
Press SUPER LASER LINK again. The lamp on
the SUPER LASER LINK button goes out.

Bcae ey eaepy
(1) ce cee Baey eepy
ecp pea ycae
epeae POWER a ecp
pee ee ON.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(3) Be eep ycae ceep
TV/VCR a eepe ee VCR.
(4) Hae y SUPER LASER LINK.
apc aa SUPER LASER LINK.
(5) Hae y N a eaepe
aaa cpee.
(6) Hapae yae SUPER LASER LINK
a ecp pe.
Opeypye ee Bae
eaep ecp
pea ye e
cp pae.

Bcpeee - Oce e

Super laser link emitter/


yae SUPER LASER LINK

Playback Basics

ce cee ecp
pea Baey eepy (e
paaec), pcpe
paee a pae eepa.
pe cee cepac
cpy cyaa ecp
pea.

e y aep
cyepaaa epea ca
Hae y SUPER LASER LINK ee
pa. aa a e SUPER LASER LINK
ace.

43

Viewing the recording on TV

pcp ac a pae
eepa

If you turn the power off


The super laser link function turns off
automatically.

Ec B e ae
y aep cyepaaa epea
ca c .

When the super laser link is activated (the


SUPER LASER LINK button is lit)
Your camcorder consumes power. Press SUPER
LASER LINK to turn off the laser link function
when it is not needed.

p e aep cyepaae
epea ca (p
ceaec a SUPER LASER
LINK)
Hae y SUPER LASER LINK
e y aep
cyepaaa epea ca, ec a
e peyec.

is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

ec p ap ppa
Sony.

44

cepecae epa ce

Recording a still image on a tape


Tape Photo recording

ac e pae a ee
cea a ey

You can record a still picture, for example, a


photograph or drawing. This mode is useful
when you want to print a picture using a video
printer (not supplied).
You can record about 510 pictures in the SP mode
and about 765 pictures in the LP mode on a
60-minute tape.
Besides the operation described here, your
camcorder can record still pictures on Memory
Sticks (p. 138) (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only).

B ee aca ee
paee, apep, pa
pcy. a pe ee p
e ea pae c
epepa (e paaec).
B ee aca 510 pae
pee SP 765 pae
pee LP a 60-y ee.
pe eca epa,
eaepa e ac
ex pae a Memory Stick
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
(cp. 138).
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee CAMERA.
(2) B pee a epe cea
aa y PHOTO ex p, a
e c ee paee.
c ap CAPTURE. ac
a e aec.
ee e
pae yce y PHOTO,
epe ee paee
ca, a ae ae epe cea
aa y PHOTO.
(3) Hae y PHOTO cee.
Hee paee a pae
caee ye
acac ce cey. B
eee x ce cey ye
acac y.
Hee paee paaec
a pae caee ex
p, a e ac ac.

cepecae epa ce

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.


(2) In the standby mode, keep pressing PHOTO
lightly until a still picture appears.
The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording
does not start yet.
To change the still picture, release PHOTO,
select a still picture again, and then press and
hold PHOTO lightly.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.
The still picture on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder is recorded for about seven
seconds. The sound during those seven
seconds is also recorded.
The still image is displayed on the LCD screen
or in the viewfinder until recording is
completed.

Advanced Recording Operations

Advanced Recording Operations

CAPTURE

PHOTO

PHOTO

45

Recording a still image on a tape


Tape Photo recording
Notes
During tape photo recording, you cannot
change the mode or setting.
When recording a still picture, do not shake
your camcorder. The picture may fluctuate.
The PHOTO button does not work:
while the fader function is set or in use
while the digital effect function is set or in use
If you record a moving subject with tape
photo recording function
When you play back the still picture on other
equipment, the picture may fluctuate.
To use the tape photo recording function
using the Remote Commander
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your
camcorder records a picture on the LCD screen
or in the viewfinder immediately.
To use the tape photo recording function
during normal CAMERA recording
Press PHOTO deeper. The still picture is then
recorded for about seven seconds and your
camcorder returns to the standby mode. You
cannot select another still picture.
To record clear and less fluctuated still
pictures
We recommend that you record on Memory
Sticks. (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)

ac e
pae a ee
cea a ey
pea
B pe ce a ey e
e pe ycay.
p ac e pae e
cpxae Bay eaepy.
paee e yc pa.
a PHOTO e paae:
pe, a ycaea
cyec y eepa.
pe, a ycaea
cyec y px
e
Ec B ee ac yec
ea c y ce
a ey
p cpee e
pae a py aapaype
paee e pa.
ca y ce
a ey c ya
ca ypae
Hae y PHOTO a ye
ca ypae. Baa
eaepa cpay ae pae a
pae caee.
ca y ce
a ey pe ac
CAMERA
Hae y PHOTO cee.
Hee paee ye
acac ce cey, a ae
eaepa epec pe a.
B e cee p pa pye
ee paee.
ac ex ee ycx
ex pae
Peeyec aca a Memory
Stick. ( e DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E)

46

Recording a still image on a tape


Tape Photo recording
Self-timer tape photo recording
You can make a tape photo recording with the
self-timer. This mode is useful when you want to
record yourself.

cea a ey aepy
caayca
M cey a ey
aepy caayca. pe ee
cyae, ec B xe ac
cce pae.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee CAMERA.
(2) Hae y SELFTIMER. ap
(aep caayca) c a
pae caee.
(3) Hae y PHOTO cee.
Taep caayca ae pa
ce c 10 c yep ca. B
cee e cey pa cea
yep ca ye ya ae, a
ae aaec aec ac.

2
SELFTIMER

3
PHOTO

1
To cancel self-timer tape photo
recording

e ce a ey
aepy caayca

Press SELFTIMER so that the


indicator
disappears from the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder while your camcorder is in the
standby mode. You cannot cancel the self-timer
tape photo recording using the Remote
Commander.

Hae y SELFTIMER,
ap
ce c paa
cae e, a
eaepa axc pee a.
cey a ey aepy caayca
e e c ya
ca ypae.

Note
The self-timer tape photo recording mode is
automatically cancelled when:
Self-timer tape photo recording is finished.
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E).

peae
Pe ce a ey aepy
caayca ye aaec ee
cyax:
cea a ey aepy
caayca aea.
epeae POWER ycae
ee OFF (CHG) VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).

cepecae epa ce

Advanced Recording Operations

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.


(2) Press SELFTIMER. The
(self-timer)
indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with
a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the
countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then
recording starts automatically.

ac e
pae a ee
cea a ey

47

Recording a still image on a tape


Tape Photo recording

ac e
pae a ee
cea a ey

Printing the still picture


You can print a still picture by using the video
printer (not supplied). Connect the video printer
using the A/V connecting cable supplied with
your camcorder.
Connect it to the AUDIO/VIDEO jack and
connect the yellow plug of the cable to the video
input of the video printer. Refer to the operating
instructions of the video printer as well.

ea e
pae
Hee paee
paceaa c epepa (e
paaec). cee epep c
cee ae ay/
e, p paaec Bae
eaepe.
cee e ey AUDIO/VIDEO, a
e eep ae cee
xy ey ecaa a
epepe. Opaec cpy
cyaa epepa.

Video printer/
Bepep

LINE IN
VIDEO S VIDEO
S VIDEO

AUDIO/VIDEO

: Signal flow/epeaa caa

If the video printer is equipped with S video


input
Use the S video connecting cable (not supplied).
Connect it to the S VIDEO jack and the S video
input of the video printer.

48

Ec epepe eec xe
e S e
cye cee ae S e
(e paaec). cee e ey
S VIDEO xy ey S e a
epepe.

Adjusting the white


balance manually

Peypa aaca
e pyy

You can manually adjust and set the white


balance. This adjustment makes white subjects
look white and allows more natural colour
balance. Normally white balance is automatically
adjusted.

B ee peypa yca
pyy aac e. a peypa
e pa e ea c
e e c ee ecece
e aaca. O aac e
cpaaec aaec.

In the standby, recording or memory mode,


in the
select a desired white balance mode in
menu settings. (p. 116)

MENU

To return to the automatic white


balance mode

pae aaecy
pey aaca e

Set WHT BAL to AUTO in the menu settings.

cae ay WHT BAL ee


AUTO ycaax e.

cepecae epa ce

n (INDOOR - pe ee):
p cp cee yc cee
B e xp cee ece,
apep, cy
p cee ea ape
py a
(OUTDOOR - pe a ye):
p ac aaa/cxa ca,
eepe ypee ap, ex
pea eepep
p cee ypece aa
pax e
HOLD:
p ac e peea a

Advanced Recording Operations

n (INDOOR):
Lighting condition changes quickly
Too bright place such as photography studios
Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps
(OUTDOOR):
Recording a sunset/sunrise, just after sunset,
just before sunrise, neon signs, or fireworks
Under a colour matching fluorescent lamp
HOLD:
Recording a single-coloured subject or
background

B pee a, ac
epe y pe aaca e
ycaax e. (cp. 116)

49

Adjusting the white balance


manually

Peypa aaca e
pyy

If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by


TV lighting
We recommend you to record in the n indoor
mode.

B cyae papa pae


cy p ee cee
Peeyec ca ac
pe ee n.

When you record under fluorescent lighting


Use the automatic white balance or hold mode.
Your camcorder may not adjust the white
balance correctly in the n indoor mode.

B cyae ac p cee aa
e cea
cye aaec pe aaca
e pe p.
Baa eaepa e e peypa
aea pa aac e
pee ee n.

In the automatic white balance mode


Point your camcorder at a white subject for about
10 seconds after setting the POWER switch to
CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:
You detach the battery for replacement.
You bring your camcorder to the outdoors from
the interior of a house, or vice versa.
In the hold white balance mode
Set the white balance to AUTO and reset to
HOLD after a few seconds when:
You change the PROGRAM AE mode.
You bring your camcorder to the outdoors from
the interior of a house, or vice versa.

B aaec pee aaca e


Hapae eaepy a e pee
pe a 10 cey ce
yca epeae POWER
ee CAMERA ye ye
aeca, a:
B ceee aape
ae.
B xe c aep ee a
yy ap.
B pee aaca e HOLD
cae aac e ee AUTO
ca epe ee HOLD epe
ec cey, a:
B eee pe PROGRAM AE.
B xe c aep ee a
yy ap.

50

Using the wide mode


You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on
the 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).
Black bands appear on the screen during
recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a]. The picture
during playing back on a normal TV [b] or a
wide -screen TV [c] are compressed in the
widthwise direction. If you set the screen mode
of the wide-screen TV to the full mode, you can
watch pictures of normal images [d].

cae
ppa pea

[b]

[a]
16:9WIDE

[d]

to ON

B pee a ycae ay
16:9WIDE ee ON
ycaax
e (cp. 116).

cepecae epa ce

In the standby mode, set 16:9WIDE in


in the menu settings (p. 116).

[c]

Advanced Recording Operations

B ee aca ppae
paee16:9 pcpa a
ppa eepe paa 16:9
(16:9WIDE).
B pe ac pee 16:9WIDE a
pae c epe c [a].
paee pe cpee a
eepe [b] a
ppa eepe [c] ye ca
pe. Ec B ycae pa
pe ppa eepa
pa pe, ye
pae pa paepa [d].

MENU

To cancel the wide mode


Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

e ppa
pea
cae ay 16:9WIDE ee
OFF ycaax e.

51

Using the wide mode


In the wide mode, you cannot select the
following functions:
Old movie
Bounce (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E only)
During recording
You cannot select or cancel the wide mode.
When you cancel the wide mode, set your
camcorder to the standby mode and then set
16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.

52

cae ppa
pea
B ppa pee e
pa ceye y:
Cape
y epecaa (
e DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
B pe ac
B e ee e e
ppa pe.
Ec y e ppa
pe, ycae eaepy pe
a, a ae ycae pe
16:9WIDE ee OFF ycaax
e.

Using the fader


function

cae
y eepa

You can fade in or out to give your recording a


professional appearance.

B ee ae eee
eee pae, pa
Bae cee pecca .

[a]

STBY

REC

FADER

Advanced Recording Operations

M.FADER*1) (mosaic)/
(aa)

BOUNCE*1) 2)
(Fade in only)/
(T ee
pae)

cepecae epa ce

OVERLAP
(Fade in only)/
(T ee
pae)
WIPE*3)
(Fade in only)/
(T ee
pae)
RANDOM DOT
(Fade in only)/
(T ee
pae)

[b]

STBY

MONOTONE
When fading in, the picture gradually changes
from black-and-white to colour.
When fading out the picture gradually changes
from colour to black-and-white.
*1) DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E only
*2) You can use this function only when
D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu settings.
*3) The sound does not wipe away.

REC
MONOTONE
p ee paee ye cee
ec ep-e e.
p a cee paee
ye cee ec e
ep-e.
*1) e DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E
*2) B ee ca y y
cyae, ec aa
D ZOOM ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
3)
* y e ye cea.

53

Using the fader function

cae y eepa

(1) When fading in [a]


In the standby mode, press FADER until the
desired fader indicator flashes.
When fading out [b]
In the recording mode, press FADER until the
desired fader indicator flashes.
The indicator changes as follows:
FADER t M.FADER* t BOUNCE* t
MONOTONE t OVERLAP t WIPE t
DOT t no indicator
The last selected fader mode is indicated first
of all.
(2) Press START/STOP. The fader indicator stops
flashing.

(1) p ee pae [a]


B pee a, aae y
FADER ex p, a e ae a
y ap eepa.
p ee pae [b]
B pee ac, aae y
FADER ex p, a e ae a
y ap eepa.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
FADER t M.FADER* t BOUNCE* t
MONOTONE t OVERLAP t WIPE t DOT
t e a
ce pax pe
eepa paaec ep.
(2) Hae y START/STOP. ap
eepa epecae a.

* DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E only

* e DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E

1
FADER

FADER

54

To cancel the fader function

e y eepa

After the fade in/out is carried out : Your


camcorder automatically returns to the normal
mode.
Before the fade in/out is carried out : Before
pressing START/STOP, press FADER until the
indicator disappears.

ce e epa e/
cee pae : Baa
eaepa aaec epec
pe.
epe ee epa e/
cee pae : aa
START/STOP ae y FADER,
a e cee ap.

cae y eepa

Note
You cannot use the following functions while
using the fader function. Also, you cannot use
the fader function while using the following
functions:
Digital effect
Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE (Overlap,
Wipe, or Random Dot function only)
Super NightShot
Tape Photo recording

peae
B e ee ca ceye
y pe ca y
eepa. pe , B e ee
ca y eepa pe
ca ceyx y:
p e
Pe ceec PROGRAM AE
( y ae, yae
pae ae a)
Pe yye ce
cea a ey

When the OVERLAP, WIPE, or RANDOM DOT


indicator appear in the standby mode
Your camcorder automatically stores the image
recorded on a tape. As the image is being stored,
the indicators flash fast, and the playback picture
disappears. At this stage, the picture may not be
recorded clearly, depending on the tape
condition.

Note on the bounce function (DCR-TRV6E/


TRV11E only)
The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the
following mode or functions:
D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings
16:9 wide
Picture effect
PROGRAM AE
While in memory mode (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
only)
You cannot use the fader function.

B pe ca y
epecaa B e ee
ca ceye y
( e DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E):
c
ycpa
Tpaca
e pae
peae y epecaa
( e DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
ap BOUNCE e ec
ceyx peax p ca
ceyx y:
aa D ZOOM ea ycaax
e
ppae paee 16:9
e pae
PROGRAM AE

cepecae epa ce

While using the bounce function, you cannot


use the following functions (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E only):
Exposure
Focus
Zoom
Picture effect

Ec pee a c
ap OVERLAP, WIPE RANDOM
DOT
Baa eaepa aaec cxpa
paee a ee. p cxpae
pae ap aae ac
a, a cpe paee
ceae. Ha ae paee e
aca ee acc
cc e.

Advanced Recording Operations

Using the fader function

p ca pea
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
B e ee ca y
eepa.

55

Using special effects


Picture effect

cae ceax
e e pae

You can digitally process images to obtain special


effects like those in films or on the TV.

B ee pay
pae p e
ye ceax e, a
ax a paax eep.

NEG. ART [a] : The colour and brightness of the


picture is reversed.
SEPIA :
The picture is sepia.
B&W :
The picture is monochrome
(black-and-white).
SOLARIZE [b] : The light intensity is clearer, and
the picture looks like an
illustration.
SLIM [c] :
The picture expands vertically.
STRETCH [d] : The picture expands
horizontally.
PASTEL [e] :
The contrast of the picture is
emphasized, and the picture
looks like an animated cartoon.
MOSAIC [f] : The picture is mosaic.

[a]

56

[b]

[c]

NEG. ART [a] : e pc pae


yy ea.
SEPIA :
paee ye ea
ce.
B&W :
paee ye
xp (ep-e).
SOLARIZE [b] : pc cea ye
yce, a paee
ye e a pcy.
SLIM [c] :
paee pacec
epa.
STRETCH [d] : paee pacec
pa.
PASTEL [e] : epaec
pacc pae,
py paec
ya .
MOSAIC [f] :
paee ye
aec.

[d]

[e]

[f]

Using special effects


Picture effect

cae ceax
e e pae

(1) In the standby or recording mode, select


P EFFECT in
in the menu settings.
(p. 116)
(2) Select the desired picture effect mode in the
menu settings.

(1) B pee a ac epe


ay P EFFECT
ycaax
e. (cp. 116)
(2) Bepe eae pe ea
pae ycaax e.

[MENU] : END

OFF
NEG. ART
SEP I A
B&W
SOLAR I ZE
SL I M
STRETCH
PASTEL
MOSA I C

MENU

To cancel the picture effect function


Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.

When you turn the power off


Your camcorder automatically returns to the
normal mode.

cae ay P EFFECT ee
OFF ycaax e.
p ca y ea
pae
B e ee pa pe cap
c y DIGITAL EFFECT.
p e a
Baa eaepa aaec epec
pe.

cepecae epa ce

While using the picture effect function


You cannot select the old movie mode with
DIGITAL EFFECT.

e y e
pae

Advanced Recording Operations

MANUAL SET
P EFFECT
WHT BAL
AUTO SHTR
RETURN

57

Using special effects


Digital effect

cae ceax
e p e

You can add special effects to recorded pictures


using the various digital functions. The sound is
recorded normally.

B ee a ceae e
a acaee paee c
pax px y.
acae y ye .

STILL
You can record a still picture so that it is
superimposed on a moving picture.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
You can record still pictures successively at
constant intervals.
LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)
You can swap a brighter area in a still picture
with a moving picture.
TRAIL
You can record the picture so that an incidental
image like a trail is left.
SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)
You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow
shutter mode is good for recording dark pictures
more brightly. However, the picture may be less
clear.
OLD MOVIE
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to
pictures. Your camcorder automatically sets the
wide mode to ON, picture effect to SEPIA, and
the appropriate shutter speed.

STILL
B ee aca ee
paee, pe aaa a
e paee.
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)
B ee aca ee
pae ceaec epe
peeee epa.
LUMI. (LUMINANCEKEY)
B ee e ee pe eca a
e pae a e
pae.
TRAIL
B ee aca paee c
e aaa.
SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)
B ee ae cpc apa.
Pe ee apa cyec
, p ac cea ee
pae ee ce. Oa,
paee e yc eee e.
OLD MOVIE
B ee cey c e
cap . Baa eaepa ye
aaec ycaaa
ppa pe ee ON,
e pae ee SEPIA
ca cecyy cpc
apa.

Still picture/
Hee
paee

Moving picture/
e
paee

Still picture/
Hee
paee

Moving picture/
e
paee

STILL

LUMI.

58

cae ceax
e p e

(1) In the standby or recording mode, press


DIGITAL EFFECT. The digital effect indicator
appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired digital effect mode.
The indicator changes as follows:
STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL y
SLOW SHTR y OLD MOVIE
(3) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. The indicator
lights up and the bars appear. In the STILL
and LUMI. modes, the still picture is stored in
memory.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the
effect.

(1) B pee a ac ae
y DIGITAL EFFECT. c
ap p ea.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa pea y p
ea.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
STILL y FLASH y LUMI. y TRAIL y
SLOW SHTR y OLD MOVIE
(3) Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
apc ap c c. B
peax STILL LUMI. ee
paee ye cxpae a.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
peyp ea.

Items to adjust

y peyp
The rate of the still picture you
want to superimpose on the
moving picture

FLASH

The interval of flash motion

LUMI.

The colour scheme of the area in


the still picture which is to be
swapped with a moving picture

TRAIL

The vanishing time of the


incidental image

SLOW SHTR

OLD MOVIE

STILL

FLASH

ecc e
pae, pe y
a a e
paee
epa pepc
e

LUMI.

Shutter speed. The larger the


shutter speed number, the slower
the shutter speed.

ea aa ac
e pae,
py y ae
paee

TRAIL

No adjustment necessary

SLOW SHTR

Bpe cea
pae
Cpc apa. e e
ea cpc apa,
e ee cpc apa

OLD MOVIE

The more bars there are on screen, the stronger


the digital effect. The bars appear in the
following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and
TRAIL.

1 DIGITAL EFFECT

e e c a pae, e cee
p e. c c
ceyx peax: STILL, FLASH, LUMI.
TRAIL.

2
3

cepecae epa ce

STILL

Advanced Recording Operations

Using special effects


Digital effect

LUMI.

LUMI.

59

Using special effects


Digital effect

cae ceax
e p e

To cancel the digital effect function

e y px
e

Press DIGITAL EFFECT again.

Hae y DIGITAL EFFECT ee pa.


Notes
The following functions do not work during
digital effect mode:
Fader
Low lux mode of PROGRAM AE
Tape Photo recording
Super NightShot
The following function does not work in the
slow shutter mode:
PROGRAM AE
The following functions do not work in the old
movie mode:
16:9 wide
Picture effect
PROGRAM AE
When you turn the power off
The digital effect will be automatically cancelled.

pea
Ceye y e paa p
ca pea p
ea:
eep
Pe ceec PROGRAM
AE
cea a ey
Pe yye ce
Ceya y e paae pee
ee apa:
PROGRAM AE
Ceye y e paa pee
cap :
ppae paee 16:9
e pae
PROGRAM AE

When recording in the slow shutter mode


Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually
using a tripod.

p e a
p e ye aaec
ee.

Shutter speed

p ac pee ee apa
Aaeca ycpa e e
e. Be ycpy
pyy, cy a.

Shutter speed number


SLOW SHTR 1
SLOW SHTR 2
SLOW SHTR 3
SLOW SHTR 4

60

Shutter speed
1/25
1/12
1/6
1/3

Cpc apa
Bea cpc apa Cpc apa
SLOW SHTR 1
1/25
SLOW SHTR 2
1/12
SLOW SHTR 3
1/6
SLOW SHTR 4
1/3

Using the PROGRAM


AE function

cae
y PROGRAM AE

You can select PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure)


mode to suit your specific shooting requirements.

B ee pa pe PROGRAM AE
(aaeca c) cec
c ceec pea cee.

Spotlight mode
This mode prevents peoples faces, for example,
from appearing excessively white when shooting
subjects lit by strong light in the theatre.

Sports lesson mode


This mode minimizes shake on fast-moving
subjects such as in tennis or golf.
Beach & ski mode
This mode prevents peoples faces from
appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski
slope.

Landscape mode
This mode is for when you are recording distant
subjects such as mountains and prevents your
camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh
in windows when you are recording a subject
behind glass or a screen.
Low lux mode
This mode makes subjects brighter in insufficient
light.

Pe cpx cca
pe e pa
pae p cee cp yxc
pee, apep, p pe ec
.
pe
pe pepaae ee
ex e e c cea
pae cea, apep, a e
paap ea a ce ce.
Pe axa ca y
pe e c paa
cay p cee ax ca,
x x , eepep
ex pea.
aa pe
pe e cey
aex e, ax a p,
pepaae ycpy eaep
a ce eaecy peey a
ax, a B ee ac e
a cea pee.

Sunset & moon mode


This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere
when you are recording sunsets, general night
views, fireworks displays, and neon signs.

M ppe pe
pe e e e a
e, x ce,
apep e e.

Advanced Recording Operations

Soft portrait mode


This mode brings out the subject while creating a
soft background for subjects such as people or
flowers.

Pe pep cee
a pe e cey
a pa, a e e
e c e, apep, p
cee e eape, e ac
peec pe ceee.

Pe ceec
pe eae e pe p
eca cee.

61

(1) In the standby or memory mode, press


PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator
appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired PROGRAM AE mode.
The indicator changes as follows:
y
y
y
y
y
y

cae y
PROGRAM AE
(1) B pee a ae
y PROGRAM AE. c
ap PROGRAM AE.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y pea PROGRAM AE.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
y
y y
y
y
y

PROGRAM

Using the PROGRAM AE function

To cancel the PROGRAM AE function


Press PROGRAM AE again.

e y PROGRAM
AE
Hae y PROGRAM AE ee pa.

62

Using the PROGRAM AE function

Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected


You can adjust the exposure.
If you are recording under a discharge tube
such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium lamp or
mercury lamp
Flickering or changes in colour may occur in the
following modes. If this happens, turn the
PROGRAM AE function off.
Soft portrait mode
Sports lesson mode

Ec aa WHT BAL ycaea


ee AUTO ycaax e
aac e ye peypa, ae
ec paa y PROGRAM AE

While WHT BAL is set to AUTO in the menu


settings
The white balance is adjusted even if the
PROGRAM AE function is selected.

pea
B peax pep cee,
cpx cca, a ae
pee e
cey py a. cec
e, Baa eaepa acpea
ycp a e,
axec a cpee ae
paccx.
B pee axa ca y, a ae
aa pee Baa eaepa
acpea a ycpy a
ae e.
Ceye y e paa pee
PROGRAM AE:
Mee ap
Cape
y epecaa (
e DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
Ceye y e paa pee
ceec:
p e
Haee pae
aee pae
aee a
oa y ce NIGHTSHOT
ycaea ee ON, y
PROGRAM AE e paae. (ap
ae.)
p cee pee pe
ceec pe cpx
cca e paa. (ap
ae.)

Advanced Recording Operations

Notes
In the spotlight, sports lesson, and beach & ski
modes, you cannot take close-ups. This is
because your camcorder is set to focus only on
subjects in the middle to far distance.
In the sunset & moon and landscape modes,
your camcorder is set to focus only on distant
subjects.
The following functions do not work in the
PROGRAM AE mode:
Slow shutter
Old movie
Bounce (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E only)
The following functions do not work in the low
lux mode:
Digital effect
Overlap
Wipe
Random dot
While setting the NIGHTSHOT to ON, the
PROGRAM AE function does not work. (The
indicator flashes.)
While shooting in memory mode, the low lux
and sports lesson modes do not work. (The
indicator flashes.)

cae y
PROGRAM AE

Ec paa y PROGRAM AE
B ee pa c.
Ec B ee ac p
ca ypece a,
ape a py a
B ceyx peax y y
epae ee ec. Ec
pe, e y PROGRAM
AE.
M ppe pe
Pe cpx cca

63

Adjusting the
exposure manually

Peypa
c pyy

You can manually adjust and set the exposure.


Adjust the exposure manually in the following
cases:
The subject is backlit
Bright subject and dark background
To record dark pictures (e.g. night scenes)
faithfully

c peypa
yca pyy. Opeypye
c pyy ceyx cyax:
Oe a e ae ce
p e a e e
ac ex pae (apep,
x ) c
cepc
(1) B pee a, ac
ae y EXPOSURE. c
ap c.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
peyp pc.

EXPOSURE

(1) In the standby, recording or memory mode,


press EXPOSURE. The exposure indicator
appears.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the
brightness.

64

To return to the automatic exposure


mode

paa pe
aaec c

Press EXPOSURE again.

Hae y EXPOSURE ee pa.

Note
When you adjust the exposure manually, the
backlight function does not work.

peae
p e peyp pyy
y ae ce e paae.

If you change the PROGRAM AE mode or slide


NIGHTSHOT to ON
Your camcorder automatically returns to the
automatic exposure mode.

Ec B ee pe PROGRAM AE
epeee epeae
NIGHTSHOT ee ON
Baa eaepa aaec epec
pe aaec c.

You can gain better results by manually adjusting


the focus in the following cases:
The autofocus mode is not effective when
shooting
subjects through glass coated with water
droplets
horizontal stripes
subjects with little contrast with backgrounds
such as walls and sky
When you want to change the focus from a
subject in the foreground to a subject in the
background
Shooting a stationary subject when using a
tripod

B ee c yx peya
ye peyp ycp pyy
ceyx cyax:
Pe aaec ycp
ec ee p e
ce
e epe ce, pe a
pax c
e c a pacc a
a e, a cea e
Ec y eee
ycp c ea a epee ae
a e a ae ae
p e ce caapx
e c cae aa

(1) In the standby, recording or memory mode,


set FOCUS to MAN. The 9 indicator
appears.
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.

(1) B pee a, ac
ycae epeae FOCUS
ee MAN. c ap 9.
(2) epe ycp
ye e ycp.

2
1

FOCUS
AUTO
MAN

ycpa pyy

Advanced Recording Operations

Focusing manually

INFINITY

65

Focusing manually

ycpa pyy

To return to the autofocus mode


Set FOCUS to AUTO.

pae pe
aaec ycp

To record distant subjects

cae epeae FOCUS


ee AUTO.

When you press FOCUS down to INFINITY, the


indicator appears. When
lens focuses on and
you release FOCUS, your camcorder returns to
the manual focus mode. Use this mode when
your camcorder focuses on near objects even
though you are trying to shoot a distant object.
To focus precisely
It is easier to focus on the subject if you adjust the
zoom to shoot at the W (wide-angle) after
focusing at the T (telephoto) position.
When you shoot close to the subject
Focus at the end of the W (wide-angle)
position.
The following indicators may appear:
When recording a distant subject.
When the subject is too close to focus on.

ce yaex e
Ec B aee y FOCUS
ee INFINITY, e
ycpy, c ap . Ec
B yce y FOCUS, eaepa
epec pe py ycp.
cye pe, ec eaepa
e ycpy a e
e, ae ec B aeec
cey ae ea.
ee ycp
Oe pc ycpy a
e, ec peypa paca
e ce e W
(pye) ce ycp
e T (ee).
Ec B ee cey
ea
Be ycpy e e
W (pye).
My c ceye ap:
p ac yaex e.
Ec e axc c ,
ycpy a e.

66

Advanced Playback Operations

cepecae epa cpee

Playing back a tape


with picture effects

Bcpeee e c
ea pae

During playback, you can process a scene using


the picture effect functions: NEG.ART, SEPIA,
B&W, and SOLARIZE.

B pe cpee
e paee c
y e pae: NEG.ART,
SEPIA, B&W, SOLARIZE.

In the playback or playback pause mode, select


in the
the desired picture effect mode in
menu settings. (p. 116)
For details of each picture effect function, see
page 56.

B pee cpee ay
cpee epe y e
ycaax e.
pae
(cp. 116)
pe cee a y
px e pee a cp. 56.

OFF
NEG. ART
SEP I A
B&W
SOLAR I ZE

[MENU] : END

To cancel the picture effect function


Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.
Notes
You cannot process externally input scenes
using the picture effect function.
To record pictures that you have processed
using the picture effect function, record the
pictures on the VCR using your camcorder as a
player.
Pictures processed by the picture effect
function
Pictures processed by the picture effect function
are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack
(DCR-TRV20E) or DV OUT jack (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E).
When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)
or stop playing back
The picture effect function is automatically
cancelled.

e y e
pae
cae ay P EFFECT ee
OFF ycaax e.
pea
B e ee e eee
ee ca pae c
y e pae.
ac pae, pe
ee c y
e pae, ae
pae a ea,
cy eaepy aece eepa.
pae, eee c
y e pae
pae, eee c
y e pae, e
epeac epe e xa/xa DV
IN/OUT (DCR-TRV20E) e DV OUT
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
p ycae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG) cae
cpee
y e pae ye
aaec eea.

MENU

Advanced Playback Operations

MANUAL SET
P EFFECT
RETURN

67

Playing back a tape


with digital effects

Bcpeee e
c p ea

During playback, you can process a scene using


the digital effect functions: STILL, FLASH,
LUMI., and TRAIL.

B pe cpee
e paee c
y px e: STILL, FLASH,
LUMI. TRAIL.

(1) In the playback or playback pause mode,


press DIGITAL EFFECT and turn the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial until the desired digital
effect indicator (STILL, FLASH, LUMI., or
TRAIL) flashes.
(2) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
The digital effect indicator lights up and the
bars appear. In the STILL or LUMI. mode, the
picture where you press the SEL/PUSH EXEC
dial is stored in memory as a still picture.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the
effect.
For details of each digital effect function, see
page 58.

(1) B pee cpee ay


cpee ae y DIGITAL
EFFECT paae c SEL/PUSH
EXEC ex p, a e ae a
ap y p ea
(STILL, FLASH, LUMI. TRAIL).
(2) Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
apc ap p ea
c c. B pee STILL
LUMI. paee, a p B
aee c SEL/PUSH EXEC, ye
aece a a ee.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
peyp ea.
pe cee a y
px e pee a cp.
58.

STILL

DIGITAL EFFECT

STILL

To cancel the digital effect function


Press DIGITAL EFFECT again.

e y px
e
Hae y DIGITAL EFFECT ee pa.

68

Playing back a tape with digital


effects

Bcpeee e c
p ea

Notes
You cannot process externally input scenes
using the digital effect function.
To record pictures that you have processed
using the digital effect function, record the
pictures on the VCR using your camcorder as a
player.

pea
B e ee e yee
ee ca pae c
y px e.
ac pae, pe
ee c y
px e, ae
pae a ea,
cy eaepy aece eepa.

When you set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)


or stop playing back
The digital effect function is automatically
cancelled.

pae, eee c
y px e
pae, eee c
y px e, e
epeac epe e xa/xa DV
IN/OUT (DCR-TRV20E) e xa
DV OUT (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
p ycae epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG) cae
cpee
y px e ye
aaec eea.

Advanced Playback Operations

Pictures processed by the digital effect


function
Pictures processed by the digital effect function
are not output through the DV IN/OUT jack
(DCR-TRV20E) or DV OUT jack (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E).

69

Enlarging images
recorded on tapes
PB ZOOM

eee pae,
acax a eax
PB ZOOM

You can enlarge still and moving playback


pictures.
You can also dub the enlarged pictures to tapes
or copy to Memory Sticks.

M yea ee
e pae.
M ae epeca yeee
pae a eacce
pa a ap Memory Stick.

(1) In the playback or playback pause mode,


press PB ZOOM on your camcorder. The
image is enlarged, and R r T t appears on
the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(2) Turn SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the
enlarged image, then press the dial.
R : The image moves downward
r : The image moves upward
(3) Turn SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the
enlarged image, then press the dial.
t : The image moves leftward (Turn the
dial to upward.)
T : The image moves rightward (Turn the
dial to downward.)

(1) B pee cpee ay


cpee ae y PB
ZOOM a Bae eaepe.
paee yeaec a pae
caee ec R r T
t.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
R : paee epeeaec
r : paee epeeaec epx
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
t : paee epeeaec e
(epe c epx.)
T : paee epeeaec pa
(epe c .)

PB ZOOM

PB ZOOM
[EXEC] :

PB ZOOM

[EXEC] :

70

To cancel the PB ZOOM function

e y PB ZOOM

Press PB ZOOM again.

Hae y PB ZOOM ee pa.

Enlarging images recorded on


tapes PB ZOOM

eee pae,
acax a eax PB ZOOM

Note
You cannot process externally input scenes using
the PB ZOOM function with your camcorder.

peae
B e ee e yee
ee ca pae c
y PB ZOOM Bae eaep.

The following functions do not work in the PB


ZOOM function:
Digital effect
While displaying the menu settings or title
The PB ZOOM function does not work .

Pictures in the PB ZOOM


Pictures in the PB ZOOM mode are not output
through the DV IN/OUT jack (DCR-TRV20E)
or DV OUT jack (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).

p pae yca e
aa
y PB ZOOM e paae.
y PB ZOOM ye aaec
eea p ca ceyx
y:
caa epeae POWER
ee OFF (CHG)
Ocae cpee
Opaee yca e
Opaee pa

pae pee PB ZOOM


pae pee PB ZOOM e
epeac epe e xa/xa DV
IN/OUT (DCR-TRV20E) e xa
DV OUT (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).

Advanced Playback Operations

The PB ZOOM function is automatically


cancelled when you operate the following
functions:
Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)
Stop playback
Display the menu settings
Display the title

Ceye y e paa p
ca y PB ZOOM:
p e

71

Quickly locating a
scene using the zero
set memory function

cp c a
c y
a ye e

Your camcorder goes forward or backward to


automatically stop at a desired scene having a
tape counter value of 0:00:00. You can do this
with the Remote Commander.

Baa eaepa e epey


epe aa c aaec
ca y e, e aae
cea e pa 0:00:00. B ee
ea c ya ca
ypae.

(1) In the playback mode, press DISPLAY.


(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you
want to locate later. The tape counter shows
0:00:00 and the ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator flashes.
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape
counters zero point. The tape stops
automatically when the tape counter reaches
approximately zero. The ZERO SET
MEMORY indicator disappears and the time
code appears.
(5) Press N. Playback starts.

(1) B pee cpee ae


y DISPLAY.
(2) Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY
ece, pe B axe a e.
aae cea cae pa
0:00:00, ae a ap
ZERO SET MEMORY.
(3) Hae y x, ec B axe
ca cpeee.
(4) Hae y m ycpe
epe e aa ye e
cea e. ea cac
aaec, ec ce ce
ye e. ap ZERO SET
MEMORY cee, c
pee.
(5) Hae y N. Haec
cpeee.
ZERO SET MEMORY

N
Notes
When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before
rewinding the tape, the zero set memory
function will be cancelled.
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds
from the time code.
The zero set memory function may not work
when there is a blank portion between pictures
on a tape.
The zero set memory functions also in the
recording standby mode
When you insert a scene in the middle of a
recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at the
point you want to end the insertion. Rewind the
tape to the insert start point, and start recording.
Recording stops automatically at the tape counter
zero point. Your camcorder returns to the
standby mode.

72

DISPLAY
pea
Ec B aee y ZERO SET
MEMORY aaa pa epe
e, y a ye e
ye eea.
Mey pee ece
peee e pacxee
ec cey.
y a ye e e e
paa cyae, ec eec
eaca yac ey
pae a ee.
y a ye e paae
ae pee c ac
Ec B cae cepee
aca e, ae y ZERO
SET MEMORY ece, e B xe
a cay a. epeae
ey ecy aaa ca a
ae ac. ac cac
aaec ece ye e
cea. Baa eaepa epec
pe a.

Searching the boundaries c pa ac


of recorded tape by title a ee py
Title search
c pa
If you use a tape with cassette memory,
you can search for the boundaries of
recorded tape by title (Title search). Use
the Remote Commander for this
operation.

TITLE SEARCH

SEARCH
MODE

1
2
3
4
5
6

HELLO!
CONGRATULATIONS!
HAPPY NEW YEAR!
PRESENT
GOOD MORNING
WEDDING

TITLE SEARCH

>

3
4
5
6
7
8

HAPPY NEW YEAR!


PRESENT
GOOD MORNING
WEDDING
NIGHT
BASEBALL

To stop searching

ca ca

Press x.

Hae x.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) cae ay CM SEARCH
ON ycaax e (cp.
ee
116). ac yca ec ON.
(3) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap TITLE
SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t
e a
(4) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa p cpee.
Baa eaepa aaec ae
cpeee a c pa
Ba p.

Advanced Playback Operations

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).


to ON in the menu
(2) Set CM SEARCH in
settings (p. 116). Factory setting is ON.
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the TITLE
SEARCH indicator appears.
The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t
no indicator
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander
to select the title for playback.
Your camcorder automatically starts playback
of the scene having the title that you selected.

Ec B cyee ey c
acce a, B ee
c pa ac a
ee py (c pa).
epa cye y
ca ypae.

73

Searching the boundaries of


recorded tape by title
Title search

c pa ac a ee
py
c pa

If you use a tape without cassette memory


You cannot search or superimpose a title.

Ec B cyee ey e acce
a
He c aee
pa.

In the
mark
The bar in the
mark indicates the
present point on the tape.
The mark in the
indicates the actual
point you are trying to search.
If a tape has a blank portion between
recorded portions
The title search function may not work correctly.
To superimpose a title
See page 108.

B ape
ca ape
eyee ec a ee.
Mea ape
eyee ec ca.

yaae

Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
y ca pa e paa
epa.
ae pa
C. cp. 108.

74

yaae

Searching a recording
by date Date search

c ac ae
c a

You can automatically search for the point where


the recording date changes and start playback
from that point (Date search). Use a tape with
cassette memory for convenience. Use the
Remote Commander for this operation.
Use this function to check where recording dates
change or to edit the tape at each recording date.

B ee aaec c
eca, e eec aa ac,
aa cpeee c eca
(c a). y ca
ey c acce a.
epa cye y ca
ypae.
cye y y ca ec
ee a ac e
aa cex x ecax.

Searching for the date by using


cassette memory

DATE SEARCH

SEARCH
MODE

1
2
3
4
5
6

5 / 9 / 00
6 / 9 / 00
24 / 12 / 00
1 / 1 / 01
11 / 2 / 01
29 / 4 / 01

B ee ca y y
p cpee e c acce
a (cp. 171).
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) cae ay CM SEARCH
ee
ON ycaax e
(cp. 116). ac yca ec
ON.
(3) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap DATE
SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t e
a
(4) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa ay cpee.
Baa eaepa aaec ae
cpeee aae pa
a.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).


(2) Set CM SEARCH in
to ON in the menu
settings (p. 116). Factory setting is ON.
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the DATE
SEARCH indicator appears.
The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t no
indicator
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander
to select the date for playback.
Your camcorder automatically starts playback
at the beginning of the selected date.

c a c
acce a

Advanced Playback Operations

You can use this function only when playing


back a tape with cassette memory (p. 171).

DATE SEARCH

>

1
2
3
4
5
6

5 / 9 / 00
6 / 9 / 00
24 / 12 / 00
1 / 1 / 01
11 / 2 / 01
29 / 4 / 01

75

Searching a recording by date


Date search

c ac ae
c a

To stop searching

ca ca

Press x.

Hae x.

Note
If one days recording is less than two minutes,
your camcorder may not accurately find the
point where the recording date changes.

peae
Ec pec ac eee
eee yx y, eaepa
e e a ec, e eec
aa ac.

In the
mark
mark indicates the
The bar in the
present point on the tape.
The mark in the
indicates the actual
point you are trying to search.

B ape
ca ape
eyee ec a ee.
Mea ape
eyee ec ca.

If a tape has a blank portion between


recorded portions
The date search function may not work correctly.
Cassette memory
The tape cassette memory can hold six recording
date data. If you search the date among seven or
more data, see Searching for the date without
using cassette memory below.

Searching for the date without


using cassette memory
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) Set CM SEARCH in
to OFF in the menu
settings (p. 116).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the DATE
SEARCH indicator appears.
The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t
PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to
search for the previous date or press > on
the Remote Commander to search for the next
date. Your camcorder automatically starts
playback at the point where the date changes.
Each time you press . or >, your
camcorder searches for the previous or next
date.

To stop searching
Press x.

76

yaae
yaae

Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
y ca a e paa
epa.
accea a
accea a a ee e
ec ec a ac. Ec
ec c a ac p a
ce ee a, c. pae c a e
ca acce a.

c ac ae e
ca acce
a
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) cae ay CM SEARCH
ee
OFF ycaax e
(cp. 116).
(3) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap DATE
SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t
PHOTO SCAN t e a
(4) Hae y . a ye
ca ypae ca
peye a y > a
ye ca ypae
ca ceye a. Beaepa
aaec ae cpeee
ece, e eec aa. Bc
pa p aa . >,
Baa eaepa e c
peye ceye a.

ca ca
Hae x.

Searching for a photo


Photo search/Photo
scan

c
c/
capae

You can search for a still picture you have


recorded on a mini DV tape (photo search).
You can also search for still pictures one after
another and display each picture for five seconds
automatically regardless of cassette memory
(photo scan). Use the Remote Commander for
these operations.
Use this function to check or edit still pictures.

B ee c e
pae, aca a ee DV
(c).
B ae ee c
ex pae a py
paa ae paee eee
cey aaec eac
acce a (capae).
x epa cye y
ca ypae.
cye y y pep
aa ex pae.

You can use this function only when playing


back a tape with cassette memory (p. 171).

B ee ca y y
p cpee e c acce
a (cp. 171)
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E) /PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) .
(2) cae ay CM SEARCH
ee
ON ycaax e (cp.
116). ac yca ec ON.
(3) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap PHOTO
SEARCH.
ap ye ec cey
pa:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t e
a
(4) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa ay cpee. Baa
eaepa aaec ae
cpeee aae pa
a.

PHOTO SEARCH

SEARCH
MODE

1
2
3
4
5
6

5 / 9 / 00
6 / 9 / 00
24 / 12 / 00
1 / 1 / 01
11 / 2 / 01
29 / 4 / 01

1 7 : 30
8 : 50
1 0 : 30
23 : 25
1 6 : 11
1 3 : 45

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)


/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) .
(2) Set CM SEARCH in
to ON in the menu
settings (p. 116). Factory setting is ON.
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the PHOTO
SEARCH indicator appears.
The indicator changes as follows:
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t
PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t
no indicator
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander
to select the date for playback. Your
camcorder automatically starts playback of
the photo having the date that you selected.

c c
acce a

Advanced Playback Operations

Searching for a photo by using


cassette memory

PHOTO SEARCH

>

1
2
3
4
5
6

5 / 9 / 00
6 / 9 / 00
24 / 12 / 00
1 / 1 / 01
11 / 2 / 01
29 / 4 / 01

1 7 : 30
8 : 50
1 0 : 30
23 : 25
1 6 : 11
1 3 : 45

To stop searching

ca ca

Press x.

Hae x.

77

Searching for a photo Photo


search/Photo scan

c c/
capae

In the
mark
The bar in the
mark indicates the
present point on the tape.
The mark in the
indicates the actual
point you are trying to search.

B ape
ca ape
eyee ec a ee.
Mea ape
eyee ec ca.

If a tape has a blank portion between


recorded portions
The photo search function may not work
correctly.

Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
y ca e paa
epa.

The available number of photos that can be


searched using the cassette memory
The available number is up to 12 photos.
However, you can search 13 photos or more
using the scanning photo function.

oec pa ca c
acce a
Macae ec - 12 pa.
Oa c 13 ee
c y capa.

Searching for a photo without


using cassette memory
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)
/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) Set CM SEARCH in
to OFF in the menu
settings (p. 116).
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the PHOTO
SEARCH indicator appears.
The indicator changes as follows:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t
PHOTO SCAN t no indicator
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander
to select the photo for playback. Each time
you press . or >, your camcorder
searches for the previous or next photo.
Your camcorder automatically starts playback
of the photo.

To stop searching
Press x.

yaae

c e
ca acce
a
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E) /PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) cae ay CM SEARCH
OFF ycaax e
ee
(cp. 116).
(3) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae
ex p, a e c ap
PHOTO SEARCH.
ap ye ec
cey pa:
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t
PHOTO SCAN t e a
(4) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae,
pa cpee.
Bc pa p aa .
>, Baa eaepa e
c peye ceye
.
Beaepa aaec ae
cpeee .

ca ca
Hae x.

78

yaae

Searching for a photo Photo


search/Photo scan
Scanning photo
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)
/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote
Commander repeatedly, until the PHOTO
SCAN indicator appears.
(3) Press . or > on the Remote
Commander.
Each photo is played back for about five
seconds automatically.

c c/
capae
Capae

SEARCH
MODE

PHOTO 00
SCAN

3
OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAMERA

To stop scanning

ca capa

Press x.

Hae x.

VCR

Advanced Playback Operations

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E) /PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) Haae y SEARCH MODE a
ye ca ypae ex
p, a e c ap PHOTO
SCAN.
(3) Hae y . > a ye
ca ypae.
ae ye aaec
paac eee pe
cey.

79

Editing

Ma

Dubbing a tape

epeac e

Using the A/V connecting cable

cae cee
ae ay/e

Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the


A/V connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder.
Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE, if
available.
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to
record over) into the VCR, and insert the
recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the
input selector to LINE.
Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)
/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your
camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR.
Refer to the operating instructions of your
VCR.

cee eaepy
eay c
cee ae ay/e,
p paaec eaepe.
cae ceep epeae
x caa a eae
ee LINE, ec ae eec.
(1) Bcae eacay ey ( ey,
a py xe ac)
ea cae acay
ey eaepy.
(2) e ea ac,
ae ycae epeae x
ee LINE.
Opaec cpy cyaa
eaa.
(3) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E) /PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(4) Hae cpeee aca
e a Bae eaepe.
(5) Hae ac a eae.
Opaec cpy cyaa
eaa.

S VIDEO

IN
S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO/VIDEO

AUDIO

: Signal flow/epeaa caa

When you have finished dubbing a


tape
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

80

Ec B a epeac e
Hae y x a eaepe a
eae.

Dubbing a tape

epeac e

Before a dubbing
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings.
(Default setting is LCD.)

epe epeac
cae apaep DISPLAY ee
LCD ycaax e. (ca
ya ec LCD.)

Be sure to clear the indicators from the screen


If they are displayed, press the follwoing buttons
not to record the indicators on the dubbed tape:
The DISPLAY button
The DATA CODE button
The SEARCH MODE button on the Remote
Commander

Connect using an S video cable (not supplied)


to obtain high-quality pictures
With this connection, you do not need to connect
the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting
cable.
Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S
video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR.
This connection produces higher quality DV
format pictures.

If your VCR is a monaural type


Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting
cable to the video input jack and the white or the
red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or
the TV. When the white plug is connected, the
left channel audio is output, and the red plug is
connected, the right channel audio is output.

B ee a a
eaax, pe
epa ceye cce
8 ,
Hi8,
VHS,
S-VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHSC, Betamax,

DV,
DV
Digital8

Editing

You can edit on VCRs that support the


following systems
8 mm,
Hi8,
VHS,
S-VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHSC, Betamax,
mini
DV, or
Digital8
DV,

Oae e ap a
pae
Ec paac, ae ceye
, e aca ap a
epeacaey ey:
y DISPLAY
y DATA CODE
y SEARCH MODE a ye
ca ypae

Ec Ba ea
ec a
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
xy ey ecaa, a e
pac eep xy ey
aycaa a eae
eepe. Ec cee e
eep, y ye aac a e
aa, a ec cee pac eep,
y ye aac a pa aa.
Be ceee c
ae S e (e paaec)
ye caecex
pae
p a cee Ba e y
a e (e) eep
cee ae ay/e.
cee ae S e (e
paaec) ea S e a
eaepe eae.
p a cee B cee
y caecee pae
paa DV.

81

Dubbing a tape

epeac e

Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting


cable)

cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting


cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT (DCRTRV20E) or DV OUT (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
and to DV IN of the DV products. With digitalto-digital connection, video and audio signals are
transmitted in digital form for high-quality
editing. You cannot dub the titles, display
indicators or the contents of cassette memory.
Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input
position if the VCR is equipped with the input
selector.

pc cee ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) (e paaec)
ey DV IN/OUT (DCR-TRV20E) DV
OUT (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) ey DV IN
aapa DV. C cee
p aee e- ayca
epeac p pe
ceye caece
aa. B e ee epeaca
p, ap a cee
cepae acce a.
cae ceep x caa a
eae ee x
caa DV, ec a eec a
eae.

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to


record over) into the VCR, and insert the
recorded tape into your camcorder.
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording.
Set the input selector to LINE. Refer to the
operating instructions of the VCR.
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)
/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) .
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your
camcorder.
(5) Start recording on the VCR.

(1) Bcae eacay ey ( ey,


a py xe ac)
ea cae acay
ey eaepy.
(2) e ea ac.
cae ceep epeae
ee LINE. Opaec cpy
cyaa eaa.
(3) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E) /PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(4) Hae cpeee aca
e a Bae eaepe.
(5) Hae ac a eae.

DV

DV IN/OUT/
DV OUT

(not supplied)/
(e paaec)

S VIDEO

LANC

DV IN

: Signal flow/epeaa caa

When you have finished dubbing a


tape
Press x on both your camcorder and the
connected DV product.

82

Ec B a epeac e
Hae y x a eaepe a
aapae DV.

Dubbing a tape

epeac e

You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK


cable (DV connecting cable).

B ee ce
ea c ae
i.LINK (cee ae DV).

The following functions do not work during


digital editing:
Digital effect
PB ZOOM
Picture effect

p ac e pae c
ea DV IN/OUT (DCR-TRV20E)
ea DV OUT (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
acaee paee ye ee.
A ec B yee cp
paee a py eaapaype,
paee ye paa.

Editing

If you record playback pause picture with the


DV IN/OUT jack (DCR-TRV20E) or DV OUT
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
The recorded picture becomes rough. And when
you play back the picture using the other video
equipment, the picture may jitter.

Ceye y e paa
pe p aa:
p e
y PB ZOOM
e pae

83

Dubbing only desired


scenes Digital program
editing

epeac yx
p
a ppa

You can duplicate selected scenes (programmes)


for editing onto a tape without operating the
VCR.
Scenes can be selected by frame.

M epa epeaca a
accey pae aa
(ppa) e eaa.
pa apa.

Unwanted scene/
Hey

Unwanted scene/
Hey

Switch the order/


e eca

Before operating the Digital program


editing

epe aa p aa
ppa

Step 1 Connecting the VCR. (p. 80, 82)


Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation. (p. 85, 89)
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronicity of the VCR.
(p. 90)

y 1 ee eaa.
(cp. 80, 82)
y 2 Hacpa eaa
pa. (cp. 85, 89)
y 3 Peypa cxpc
eaa. (cp. 90)

When you dub using the same VCR again, you


can skip steps 2 and 3.

Using the Digital program editing


function

Ec epeac pc c
e eaa,
pyc y 2 3.

Operation 1 Making the programme. (p. 93)


Operation 2 Performing a Digital program
editing (Dubbing a tape). (p. 95)

cae y p
aa ppa

Step 1: Connecting the VCR


Connect your camcorder and the VCR as shown
on pages 80, 82.
You can connect both an AV cable and an i.LINK
cable (DV connecting cable).

84

ece 1 Ccaee ppa.


(cp. 93)
ece 2 Bee p aa
ppa (epeac
acce). (Cp. 95)

y 1: ee
eaa
e eaepy
ea, a aa a cp. 80,
82.
e ca a
ae - ay/e i.LINK
(cee ae DV).

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

Step 2: Setting the VCR for


operation Using the infrared
rays emitter

y 2: Hacpa
eaa pa
p papacx ye

To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by


infrared ray to the remote sensor on the VCR.
When you connect using an AV connecting cable,
follow the procedures below.

p e aa c cae
eaa ca a e a ypae -ca.
Ec ee pc c
cee ay/e ae,
e peyp, yaae e.

Set the IR SETUP code


(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
on your camcorder.
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on,
then set the input selector to LINE.
When you connect a video camera recorder,
set its POWER switch to VCR/VTR.
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT
SET, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
CONTROL, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR,
then press the dial.
(8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR
SETUP, then press the dial.
(9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the IR
SETUP code of your VCR (p. 86), then press the
dial.

caa a IR SETUP

Editing

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) a Bae
eaepe.
(2) Be ae e
eaa ycae
epeae x ee LINE.
p cee eaep ycae
ee epeae POWER ee VCR/
VTR.
(3) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
, a ae ae a c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
EDIT SET, a ae ae a c.
(6) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
CONTROL, a ae ae a c.
(7) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
IR, a ae ae a c.
(8) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
IR SETUP, a ae ae a c.
(9) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
a IR SETUP a Bae eae
(cp. 86), a ae ae a c.

3 MENU
4

6-9
OTHERS
MELODY
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPL AY
V I DEO ED I T
ED I TSET

[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP 3
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

5
OTHERS
ED I TSET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

85

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

About the IR SETUP code


The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of
your camcorder. Be sure to set the correct code,
depending on your VCR. Code number 1 is
preset at the factory.

pa e IR SETUP
IR SETUP cepc a
eaep. cae pa ,
cecy cyey
eay. Ha pepee ya ycaaaec
ep 1.

Brand
pa-e

Brand
pa-e

Sony
Aiwa
Akai
Alba
Aristona
Baird
Blaupunkt
Bush
Canon
CGM
Clatronic
Daewoo
Ferguson
Fisher
Funai
Goldstar
Goodmans
Grundig
Hitachi
ITT/Nokia Instant
JVC
Kendo
Loewe
Luxor
Mark
Matsui
Mitsubishi

Remote control mode


Pe ya
ca
ypae
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
47, 53, 54
62, 50, 74
73
84
36, 30
83, 78
74
97
47, 83, 36
73
26
76
73
80
47
26, 84
83, 09
42, 56
36
12, 21, 15, 11
47
16, 47, 84
89
26*
47,60, 58*
28, 29

Nokia
Nokia Oceanic
Nordmende
Okano
Orion
Panasonic
Philips
Phonola
Roadstar
SABA
Samsung
Sanyo
Schneider
SEG
Seleco
Sharp
Siemens
Tandberg
Telefunken
Tensai
Thomson
Thorn
Toshiba
Universum
W.W. House
Watoson

Remote control mode


Pe ya
ca
ypae
89, 36
89
76
60, 62, 63
70, 58*
16, 78, 96
83, 84, 86
83, 84
47
76, 21
93, 94, 52, 22
36
84, 10
73
47, 74
89
10, 36
26
91, 92
73
76, 100
36, 47
40
92, 70, 47
47
83, 58

* TB/ea
* TV/VCR component
Note on remote control mode
You cannot do the assemble editing with some
VCRs (for recording) if the remote control mode
does not correspond to this VCR (for playing).

86

peae pey ya
ca ypae
C ep eaa e
a ( ac), ec pe
ya ca ypae e
cecye y eay (
cpee).

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

Setting the modes to cancel the


recording pause on the VCR

caa pe e
ay p ac a
eae

(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select


PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
mode to cancel recording pause on the VCR,
then press the dial.
The correct button depends on your VCR.
Refer to the operating instructions of your
VCR.

(1) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC


pa PAUSEMODE, a ae ae a
c.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC,
pa pe e ay p
ac a eae, a ae
ae a c.
Bp pa ye ace
eaa.
Opaec cpy cyaa
eaa.
Editing

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
REC
I R TEST
PB
RETURN
[MENU] : END

The buttons to cancel recording pause on the


VCR
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To
cancel recording pause:
Select playback pause if the button to cancel
recording pause is X.
Select recording if the button to cancel
recording pause is z.
Select playback if the button to cancel
recording pause is N.

Setting your camcorder and the VCR


to face each other
Locate the infrared ray emitter of your camcorder
and face it towards the remote sensor of the VCR.
Set the devices about 30 cm (11 7/8 in.) apart, and
remove any obstacles between the devices.

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE PAUSE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

e ay p ac a
eae
ac acc e
eaa. e ay p
ac:
Bepe pe ay cpee,
ec a e ay ac: X.
Bepe pe ac, ec a
e ay ac: z.
Bepe pe cpee, ec
a e ay ac: N.

caa eaep
eaa apae
py pyy
papac yae eaep
ex apa a a
ca ypae
eaa.
cae ycpca a pacc
pep 30 c ycpae e
pec ey .
VCR

Remote sensor/a ca ypae

87

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

Confirming the VCR operation

epee pa
eaa

(1) Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set


to recording pause.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select IR
TEST, then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is
correct.
When finished, the indicator changes to
COMPLETE.

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
RETURN
I R TEST
EXECUTE
RETURN
[MENU] : END

When the VCR does not operate correctly


After checking the code in About the IR
SETUP code set the IR SETUP or the
PAUSEMODE again.
Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (11 7/8 in.)
away from the VCR.

88

(1) Bcae accey ac


ea, ae ycae
pe ay ac.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa IR TEST, a ae ae a c.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca EXECUTE, a ae
ae a c.
Ec ea p
ac, aae pay
acpy.
a, ap epec a
COMPLETE.

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
COMPLETE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

Ec ea paae
epa
ce pep a paee
pa e IR SETUP. ca
epe e ay IR SETUP
PAUSEMODE.
cae eaepy a pacc e
eee 30 c eaa.

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

Step 2: Setting the VCR for


operation Using the i.LINK
cable (DV connecting cable)

y 2: Hacpa
eaa pa
cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)

When you connect using i.LINK cable (DV


connecting cable) (not supplied), follow the
procedures below.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) a Bae
eaepe.
(2) Be ae a cee
eae, ae ycae
ceep x caa ee
x caa DV.
p cee p
eaep ycae ee
epeae POWER ee VCR/
VTR.
(3) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa
, a ae ae a c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa EDIT SET, a ae ae a
c.
(6) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa CONTROL, a ae ae a
c.
(7) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa i.LINK, a ae ae a c.

Editing

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)


/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) on your
camcorder .
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on,
then set the input selector to DV input.
When you connect a digital video camera
recorder, set its POWER switch to VCR/VTR.
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT
SET, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
CONTROL, then press the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
i.LINK, then press the dial.

p e cee c
ae i.LINK (cee ae DV)
(e paaec) e peyp,
yaae e.

3 MENU
6,7
5

OTHERS
MELODY
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPL AY
V I DEO ED I T
ED I TSET

[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
IR
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
IR
CONTROL
i . L I NK
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

i . L I NK

89

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing
Step 3: Adjusting the
synchronicity of the VCR
You can adjust the synchronicity of your
camcorder and the VCR.
Have a pen and paper ready for notes.
(1) Set the POWER swtich to VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
on your camcorder.
(2) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to
record over) into the VCR, then set to
recording pause.
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, the
above procedure is not necessary.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ
TEST, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
IN and OUT are recorded on an image for
five times each to calculate the numerical
values for adjusting the synchronicity.
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder. When
finished, the indicator changes to
COMPLETE.
(5) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow
playback.
Take a note of the opening numerical value of
each IN and the closing numerical value of
each OUT.
(6) Calculate the average of all the opening
numerical values of each IN, and the average
of all the closing numerical values of each
OUT.

90

epeac yx
p a ppa
y 3: Peypa
cxpc
eaa
M peypa cxpc
eaep eaa.
pe pyy yay ae.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) a Bae
eaepe.
(2) Bcae eacay ey ( ey,
a py xe ac)
BM, a ae ycae pe ay
ac.
p pe i.LINK epeaee
CONTROL caa e peypa
ec eae.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa ADJ TEST, a ae ae a
c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca EXECUTE, a ae
ae a c.
IN OUT acac a paee
pa aa, pacca
ce ae peyp
cxpc.
Ha pae caee
ae ap EXECUTING.
a, ap epec a
COMPLETE.
(5) epeae accey eae
a aa, ae e aeee
cpeee.
Opae ae a ce aee
p a e IN ce
aee ap a e OUT.
(6) Paccae cpeee aee cex
cx ae p a
e IN, a ae cpeee aee cex
cx ae ap a
e OUT.

(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select


CUT-IN, then press the dial.
(8) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
average numerical value of IN, then press
the dial.
The calculated start position for recording is
set.
(9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
CUT-OUT, then press the dial.
(10) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
average numerical value of OUT, then press
the dial.
The calculated stop position for recording is
set.
(11) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
RETURN, then press the dial.

(7) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC


pa CUT-IN, a ae ae a
c.
(8) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa cpee c ae IN,
ae ae a c.
Paccae aae ee
ac ycae.
(9) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa CUT-OUT, a ae ae a
c.
(10) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa cpee c ae
OUT, ae ae a c.
Paccae ee ee
ac ycae.
(11) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa RETURN, a ae ae a
c.

epeac yx
p a ppa

Editing

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

7
3,4

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST RETURN
EXECUTE
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETUN
OTHERS
[MENU] : END
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST EXECUT I NG
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT No .2
IN
I R SETUP
+215
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETUN
[MENU] : OTHERS
END
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST COMPLETE
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

9
OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

OTHERS
ED I TSET
CONTROL
ADJ TEST
CUT - I N
CUT -OUT
I R SETUP
PAUSEMODE
I R TEST
RETURN
[MENU] : END

91

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

Notes
If you start recording from the very beginning
of the tape, the first few seconds of the tape
may not record properly. Be sure to allow about
10 seconds lead before starting the recording.
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or
the contents of cassette memory.
When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable), you may not be able to
operate the dubbing function correctly,
depending on the VCR.
Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of
your camcorder .
When editing digital video, the operation
signals cannot be sent with DIGITAL I/O/
(LANC).

pea
Ec ac aaec c ca aaa
acce, epe ec cey a
ey e acac paee
eyepe aeca. pee
e aa ac, ex pyc
pe 10 cey a ee.
B e ee epeaca p,
ap a cee cepae
acce a.
p e c ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) y
epeac e paa epa,
acc eaa.
B ycaax e eaep
ycae epeae CONTROL
ee IR.
p ae p e ca
ypae e epeca epe
DIGITAL I/O/ (LANC).

If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV


connecting cable)
With digital-to-digital connection, video and
audio signals are transmitted in digital form for
high-quality editing.
When the operations of the VCR do not work
with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)
Keep the i.LINK connection, and select IR.

Ec ee pc c
ae i.LINK (cee
ae DV)
C cee p aee
e- ayca epeac
p pe ceye
caece aa.
Ec ypaee ea p
ae i.LINK e paae
(cee ae DV)
He a i.LINK, epe IR.

92

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

Operation 1: Making the


Programme

ece 1: Ccaee
ppa

STOP

REW

PLAY

FF

PAUSE

5,7

(1) Bcae accey, c p B xe


pec ac, eaepy, a
accey ac - ea.
(2) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa
, a ae ae a c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
VIDEO EDIT, a ae ae a c.
(5) C ypae e
ae aa ep a, p
B xe ca, e pe
ay cpee (cp. 39).
(6) Hae y MARK a ye
ca ypae (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E), a
c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Mec aaa IN ep
appapa a ycae,
e epxe apa e
ppa eec a ce-y.
(7) C ypae e
ae e ep a, p
B xe ca, e pe
ay cpee.
(8) Hae y MARK a ye
ca ypae (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E), a
c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Mec a OUT ep
appapa a
ycae, e e apa
e ppa eec a cey.
(9) pe y c 5 8, ae
ycae pe PROGRAM.
ce aepe ppapa
e apa e eec a
ce-y.
B ee yca acy 20
ppa.

Editing

(1) Insert the tape for playback into your


camcorder, and insert a tape for recording
into the VCR.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.
(5) Search for the beginning of the first scene you
want to insert using the video operation
buttons, then pause playback (p. 39).
(6) Press MARK on the Remote Commander
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only), or the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.
The IN point of the first programme is set,
and the top part of the programme mark
changes to light blue.
(7) Search for the end of the first scene you want
to insert using the video operation buttons,
then pause playback.
(8) Press MARK on the Remote Commander
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only), or the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.
The OUT point of the first programme is set,
then the bottom part of the programme mark
changes to light blue.
(9) Repeat steps 5 to 8, then set PROGRAM.
When the programme is set, the programme
mark changes to light blue.
You can set maximum of 20 programmes.

4
V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START

OTHERS
BEEP
COMMANDER
D I SPL AY
V I DEO ED I T READY
ED I TSET

TOTAL
SCENE

0:32:30:14
1 IN

0:00:00:00
0

[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

6,8,9
V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START
TOTAL
SCENE
[MENU] : END

0:08:55:06
1 OUT

0:00:00:00
0

V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START
TOTAL
SCENE
[MENU] : END

0:09:07:06
2 IN

0:00:12:13
1

V I DEO ED I T
MARK
UNDO
ERASE AL L
START
TOTAL
SCENE

0:10:01:23
4 IN

0:00:47:12
3

[MENU] : END

93

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing

epeac yx
p a ppa

Erasing the programme you have set

aee ppa cee


appapa a

Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last


programme.
(1) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
UNDO, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
The last set programme mark flashes, then the
setting is cancelled.
To cancel erasing
Select RETURN in step 2, then press the dial.

Erasing all programmes


(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings.
Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
ERASE ALL, then press the dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
All the programme marks flash, then the
settings are cancelled.
To cancel erasing all programmes
Select RETURN in step 2, then press the dial.
To cancel a programme you have set
Press MENU.
The programme is stored in memory until the
tape is ejected.
On a blank portion of the tape
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portion of
the tape.
If there is a blank portion between IN and
OUT on the tape
The total time code may not be displayed
correctly.

Caaa yae ey OUT, a ae ey


IN cee appapa
a.
(1) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa UNDO, a ae ae a c.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca EXECUTE, a ae
ae a c.
ap cee
appapa a ae
a, yca a
cpcc.
e yae
Bepe RETURN ye 2, ae
ae a c.

aee ppa cex


appapax
(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT ycaax e.
epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa ERASE ALL, a ae ae a
c.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca EXECUTE, a ae
ae a c.
Bce ap appapax
ay a, yca
cpcc.
e yae cex
appapax
Bepe RETURN ye 2, ae
ae a c.
e ppa
Hae y MENU.
ppaa xpac a ea
ee acce aep.
Ha eaca yace e
He yca e aaa IN
a OUT a eaca ac
e.
Ec a ee ec eaca yac
ey ea IN OUT
o pee e paac
epa.

94

Dubbing only desired scenes


Digital program editing
Operation 2: Performing a
Digital program editing
(Dubbing a tape)
Make sure your camcorder and VCR are
connected, and that the VCR is set to recording
pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable) the following procedure is not
necessary.
When you use a digital video camera recorder,
set its POWER switch to VCR.

To stop dubbing
Press x using the video operation buttons.
To end the programme editing function
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing is
complete. Then the display returns to VIDEO
EDIT in the menu settings.
Press MENU to end the programme editing
function.
You cannot record on the VCR when:
The cassette is not inserted.
The tape has run out.
The write-protect tab is set to expose the red
mark.
The IR SETUP code is not correct. (When IR is
selected.)
The button to cancel recording pause is not
correct (When IR is selected.) (see page 87).
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen when:
The programme to operate the Digital program
editing has not made.
i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV
connecting cable) is not connected.
The power of the connected VCR is not turned
on. (when you set i.LINK).

eec, eaepa ea
eay, a ea
e pe ay p ac.
p ca ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) caa e
peypa ec eae.
p ac a py eaepy
ycae ee epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(1) Bepe VIDEO EDIT. epe c
SEL/PUSH EXEC pa START, a
ae ae a c.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca EXECUTE, a ae
ae a c.
Hae aa ep
appapa a ae
epeac.
aae ap e ppa.
ap SEARCH ec pe
ca, a ap EDIT ec
pe aa a pae
caee.
ce aepe epeac e
apa PROGRAM eec a
ce-y.
oa aaaec epeac,
eaepa ea
aaec caaac.
ca epeac
Hae x c ypae
e.
aepe y aa
ppa
Beaepa caaaec ce
aepe epeac. ae a cee
ca ec aa VIDEO EDIT
ycaax e.
Hae y MENU aepe
y aa ppa.
Ha ea e yacc
pec ac, ec:
He caea accea.
aac ea.
eec a ac ycae a,
a paca ea.
Hepa IR SETUP. (a pa IR.)
a e ay p ac
ec eep (a pa IR.) (c.
cp. 87).
Hac NOT READY ec a pae
, ec:
He a ccaea ppaa ypae
p a ppa.
Bpa i.LINK, ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) e e.
e ea e
e (p ycae i.LINK).

When the dubbing ends, your camcorder and the


VCR automatically stop.

ece 2: Bee
p aa ppa
(epeac acce)

Editing

(1) Select VIDEO EDIT. Turn the SEL/PUSH


EXEC dial to select START, then press the
dial.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
EXECUTE, then press the dial.
Search for the beginning of the first
programme, then start dubbing.
The programme mark indicator flashes.
The SEARCH indicator appears during
search, and the EDIT indicator appears during
edit on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
The PROGRAM indicator changes to light
blue after dubbing is complete.

epeac yx
p a ppa

95

Using with analog video


unit and PC Signal
convert function

cae c aa
eycpca
y pepaa caa

DCR-TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV20E

You can convert analog video signals into digital


video signals via your camcorder connected to a
PC and analog video unit.

M p pepaae
aax eca pe
eca epe Bay eaepy,
ey aay
eycpcy.
Aae eca t pe
eca
Bae eaepe c
pae i.LINK (DV), aca
ee ap y c aa
eycpca.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR.
(2) cae apaep DISPLAY

ee LCD ycaax e.
(3) cae ay A/V t DV OUT
ee
ON ycaax e.
(4) Be pe cpee a
aa eycpce e
pae eca, c p y
aa ac ap.
(5) Hae ac ap a Bae .
p ec p ac
Bae cye ppa
ecee.
ee py pa ac
ap c. cpyx cyaa
ppa ecee.

Analog video signals t Digital video signals


You can capture images and sound from an
analog video unit connecting a PC which has the
i.LINK (DV) jack to your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.
(2) Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu
settings.
(3) Set A/V t DV OUT in
to ON in the
menu settings.
(4) Start playback on the analog video unit
slightly ahead of the point from which you
want to start capturing images.
(5) Start capturing procedures on your PC. The
operation procedures depend on your PC and
the software which you use.
For details on how to capture images, refer to
the instruction manual of PC and software.

VCR

DV IN/OUT
IN

i. LINK

S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO

: Signal flow/
epeaa caa

96

After capturing images and sound


Stop capturing procedures on your PC, and stop
the playback on the analog video unit.

ce ac ap ya
pepae peypy ac a
cae cpeee a aa
eycpce.

Notes
You need to install software which can
exchange video signals.
Depending on the condition of the analog video
signals, the PC may not be able to output the
images correctly when you convert analog
video signals into digital video signals via your
camcorder. Depending on the analog video
unit, the image may contain noise or incorrect
colours.

pea
Ba y yca ppae
eceee, eceaee e
ecaa.
B acc aeca aa
ecaa, e paa ap
epa ce pepaa
eaep aax eca
pe. B acc aa
eycpca, paee e
paca c epa
eepeae.

Recording video or TV
programmes

ac e
eeppa

DCR-TRV20E only
Using the A/V connecting cable

T e DCR-TRV20E
cae cee
ae ay/e

You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV


programme from a TV that has video/audio
outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.

(1) Bcae cy ey ( ey, a


py y ac)
eaepy. p ac e c
eaa cae acay
ey ea.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR a Bae eaepe.

(3) cae apaep DISPLAY


ee LCD ycaax e.
(4) Opee ae y z REC
y cpaa ee a eaepe,
ae cpay ae y X a
eaepe.
(5) Hae y N a eae
aaa cpee, ec ac
ec c eaa.
Bepe eey ppay, ec
ac ec c eepa.
paee c eepa
eaa c a pae
caee.
(6) Hae y X a eaepe
ece, e y aa ac.

Editing

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to


record over) into your camcorder. If you are
recording a tape from the VCR, insert a
recorded tape into the connected VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your
camcorder.
to LCD in the menu
(3) Set DISPLAY in
settings.
(4) Press z REC and the button on its right
simultaneously on your camcorder, then
immediately press X on your camcorder.
(5) Press N on the connected VCR to start
playback if you record a tape from a VCR.
Select a TV programme if you record from a
TV. The picture from a TV or VCR appears on
the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(6) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where
you want to start from.

M ac a ey c py
eaa aca
eey ppay c eepa,
p ee e/ay x.
cye eaepy aece
acae ycpca.

PAUSE

REC

S VIDEO
OUT
TV

AUDIO/VIDEO

S VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO

: Signal flow/epeaa caa

97

Recording video or TV
programmes
When you have finished dubbing a
tape
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Using the Remote Commander


In step 4, press z REC and MARK
simultaneously, then immediately press X. And
in step 6, press X at the scene where you want to
start recording from.
Note
When the picture from the VCR or TV does not
appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder,
check if the A/V connecting cable is connected to
the output jack for playback.
If your VCR is a monaural type
Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting
cable to the video output jack and the white or
the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR
or the TV. When the white plug is connected, the
left channel audio is output, and the red plug is
connected, the right channel audio is output.
Connect using an S vido cable (not supplied)
to obtain high-quality pictures
With this connection, you do not need to connect
the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting
cable.
Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S
(S1) video jacks of both your camcorder and the
VCR.
This connection produces higher quality DV
format pictures.

98

ac e eeppa
Ec B a epeac e
Hae y x a eaepe a
eae.

cae ya
ca ypae
B ye 4 pee ae y z
REC y MARK, ae cpay ae
y X. B ye 6 ae y X
ece, e y aa ac.
peae
a paee c eaa
eepa e ec a pae
caee, pepe, e
cee ae ay/e
xy ey eaa
eepa.
Ec Ba ea
ec a
cee e eep
cee ae ay/e
xy ey ecaa, a e
pac eep - xy ey
aycaa a eae
eepe. Ec cee e
eep, y ye aac a e
aa, a ec cee pac eep,
y ye aac a pa aa.
Ceee c eae S (e
x e) ye
caecex pae
p a cee Ba e y
a e (e) eep
cee ae ay/e.
cee eae S (e x
e) eea S (S1) a
eaepe eae.
p a cee B cee
y caecee pae
paa DV.

Recording video or TV
programmes

ac e eeppa

Using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting


cable)

cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)

Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting


cable) (not supplied) to DV IN/OUT and to DV
IN/OUT of the DV products. With digital-todigital connection, video and audio signals are
transmitted in digital form for high-quality
editing.

pc cee ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV) (e x
e) ey DV IN/OUT ey DV
IN/OUT aapa DV. C
cee p aee e-
ayca epeac p pe
ceye caece
aa.

(1) Bcae eacay ey ( ey,


a py y ac)
eaepy, a acay ey -
ea.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR a Bae eaepe.
(3) cae apaep DISPLAY

ee LCD ycaax e.
(4) Opee ae y z REC
y cpaa ee a eaepe,
ae cpay ae y X a
eaepe.
(5) Hae y N a eae
aaa cpee.
acaee paee c a
pae caee.
(6) Hae y X a eaepe
ece, e y aa ac.

Editing

(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to


record over) into your camcorder, and insert
the recorded tape into the connected VCR.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your
camcorder.
(3) Set DISPLAY in
to LCD in the menu
settings.
(4) Press z REC and the button on its right
simultaneously on your camcorder, then
immediately press X on your camcorder.
(5) Press N on the connected VCR to start
playback. The picture to be recorded appears
on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(6) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where
you want to start from.

PAUSE

REC

DV IN/OUT
DV

S VIDEO

LANC

: Signal flow/epeaa caa

99

Recording video or TV
programmes
When you have finished dubbing a
tape
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.

Using the Remote Commander


In step 4, press z REC and MARK
simultaneously, then immediately press X. And
in step 6, press X at the scene where you want to
start recording from.
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK
cable (DV connecting cable).
When you dub a picture in digital form
The colour of the display may be uneven.
However this does not affect the dubbed picture.
If you record playback pause picture with the
DV IN/OUT jack
The recorded picture becomes rough. And when
you play back the picture using your camcorder,
the picture may jitter.
Before recording
Make sure if the DV IN indicator appears on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder. The DV IN
indicator may appear on both equipment.

ac e eeppa
Ec B a epeac e
Hae y x a eaepe a
eae.

cae ya
ca ypae
B ye 4 pee ae y z
REC y MARK, ae cpay ae
y X. B ye 6 ae y X
ece, e y aa ac.
C ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV)
ce
ea.
p epeac pae p
e
e pae e e.
Oa e e a epeac
pae.
p ac e pae c
ea DV IN/OUT
acaee paee ye ee.
p cpee pae a
a eaepe e pa.
epe ac
eec, a pae
caee c ap DV IN.
ap DV IN e c a x
aapaax.

100

Inserting a scene a
from VCR
Insert editing

Bcaa a c
eaa
Ma ca

DCR-TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV20E

You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto


your originally recorded tape by specifying the
insert start and end points. Use the Remote
Commander for this operation. Connections are
the same as on page 97 or 99.
Insert a cassette containing the desired scene to
insert into the VCR.

M ca c
eaa a ye acay ey,
yaa eca e aaa a.
epa cye y
ca ypae. ae
cee aa ca a cp. 97
99.
Bcae accey c ex
ca ea.

[a]
Editing

[A]

[c]

[B]

[b]

[C]

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:

A tape that contains the scene to be


superimposed
A tape before editing
A tape after editing

[A]:
[B]:
[C]:

ea, cepaa
ae
ea epe a
ea ce aa

101

Inserting a scene a from VCR


Insert editing
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your
camcorder.
(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the
insert start point [a], then press X to set the
VCR to the playback pause mode.
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end
point [c] by pressing m or M. Then press
X to set it to the playback pause mode.
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander. The ZERO SET MEMORY
indicator flashes and the end point of the
insert is stored in memory. The tape counter
shows "0:00:00."
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start
point [b] by pressing m, then press z REC
and the button on its right simultaneously.
(6) First press X on the connected VCR, and after
a few seconds press X on your camcorder to
start inserting new scene.
Inserting automatically stops near the zero
point on the tape counter. Your camcorder
automatically returns to the recording pause
mode.

Bcaa a c
eaa
Ma ca
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR a Bae eaepe.
(2) Ha eae ae ec, e
ye cae [a], ae ae
y X yca
eaa pe ay
cpee.
(3) Ha eaepe ae e
cae a [c], aa y
m M. ae ae y X
yca ee pe ay
cpee.
(4) Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY a
ye ca ypae.
ap ZERO SET MEMORY ae
a, a ec a ca ye
cxpae a. aae cea
cae pa 0:00:00.
(5) Ha eaepe ae ec aaa
cae a [b], aa y
m, ae pee ae y
z REC y cpaa ee.
(6) Caaa ae y X a
eae , cyc ec
cey, y X a eaepe
aaa ca ce.
Bcaa cac aaec
ece ye e cea.
Beaepa aaec epec
pe ay ac.

5
REC

0:00:00

ZERO SET
MEMORY

ZERO SET
MEMORY

To change the insert end point


Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step 5 to
erase the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator and
begin from step 3.

102

ee eca a
ca
Ca ae y ZERO SET MEMORY
ce ya 5 yae apa
ZERO SET MEMORY ae c ya 3.

Inserting a scene a from VCR


Insert editing
Using the Remote Commander
In step 5, press z REC and MARK
simultaneously, then immediately press X. And
in step 6, press X at the scene where you want to
start recording from.
Note
The picture and sound recorded on the portion
between the insert start and end points will be
erased when you insert the new scene.

To insert a scene without setting the insert


end point
Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to
stop inserting.

B ye 5 pee ae y
z REC y MARK, ae cpay ae
y X. B ye 6 ae y X
ece, e y aa ac.
peae
paee y, acae a ee
ey eca aaa a ca,
yy cep p cae a.
p cae a ey,
acay a py eaepe
(a pye e DCR-TRV20E)
paee y y caac.
Peeyec ca a ey,
acay c a eaep.
p cpee cae
pae
paee y y caac
e cae a. Oa e
ec ecpac.
paee y pee LP y
caac aae e cae
a.

When the inserted picture is played back


The picture and sound may be distored at the
end of the inserted portion. This is not a
malfunction.
The picture and sound at the start point and the
end point may be distored in the LP mode.

cae ya
ca ypae

Editing

If you insert scenes on the tape recorded with


other camcorder (including other DCR-TRV20E)
The picture and sound may be distored. We
recommend that you insert scenes on a tape
recorded with your camcorder.

Bcaa a c
eaa
Ma ca

ca a e yaa eca
a ca
pyce y 3 4. Hae y x,
a y ca cay.

103

Audio dubbing

Ayepeac

You can record an audio sound to add to the


original sound on a tape by connecting audio
equipment or a microphone. If you connect the
audio equipment, you can add sound to your
recorded tape by specifying starting and ending
points. The original sound will not be erased.
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.

B ee aca ayca
ee epaay yy a
ee, ce ayaapaypy
p. Ec B cee
ayaapa, B ee a y a
Bay acay ey ye yaa
e aaa a. epaa
p y e ye cep.
epa cye y
ca ypae.

Connecting the microphone


with the MIC jack

ceee pa
ey MIC

MIC
(PLUG IN
POWER)

: Signal flow/
Microphone (not supplied)/Mp (e paaec)
epeaa caa
B ee pep acae
You can check the recorded picture and sound by
paee y, ce e
connecting the AUDIO/VIDEO jack to a TV.
AUDIO/VIDEO eepy.
The recorded sound is not output from a speaker.
aca y e aec a
Check the sound by using the TV or headphones.
aycecy ccey. pepe y c
eepa x
ee.

Connecting the microphone


with the intelligent accessory
shoe

Microphone (not supplied)/


Mp (e paaec)

104

ceee pa c
epae
caex
paece
Intellingent Accessory Shoe/epae
caex paece

Audio dubbing
Dubbing with the AUDIO/VIDEO
jack
DCR-TRV20E only

Ayepeac
epeac c ea
AUDIO/VIDEO
T e DCR-TRV20E
Audio equipment/
Ayaapaypa

LINE OUT
L
R

AUDIO L

AUDIO R

Do not connect the


video (yellow) plug./

He cee e
(e) eep.

Dubbing with the built-in


microphones

: Signal flow/epeaa caa

Editing

AUDIO/
VIDEO

epeac c
cpe pa

No connection is necessary.

Hae cee e peyc.

Notes
The picture is not output from the AUDIO/
VIDEO jack. Check the recorded picture on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder, as well as
check the recorded sound by using
headphones.
When dubbing with the built-in microphone or
an external one, you can check the recorded
picture on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder, or
on the screen of equipment connected with the
S VIDEO jack, and can check the recorded
sound by using headphones.

pea
Ca pae e yy cya
ea AUDIO/VIDEO. pepe
acaee paee a pae
caee, a acae y c
x ee.
p epeac c cae
cpe ee pa
pep acaee
paee a pae ,
caee a pae aapayp,
e c ea S VIDEO,
a ae acae y, cy
e ee.

105

Audio dubbing

Ayepeac

Adding an audio sound on a


recorded tape

aee y caa
a acay ey

(1) Insert your recorded tape into your


camcorder.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)
/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) on your
camcorder.
(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing
N. Then press X at the point where you
want to start recording to set your camcorder
to playback pause mode.
(4) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote
Commander.
The green
X indicator appears on the LCD
screen or in the viewfinder.
(5) Press X on the Remote Commander or on
your camcorder, and at the same time, start
playing back the audio you want to record.
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2)
during playback.
(6) Press x on the Remote Commander at the
point where you want to stop recording.

(1) Bcae Bay acay ey


eaepy
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) a Bae
eaepe.
(3) Hae ec aaa ac, aa
y N. ae ae y X
ece, e B xe aa ac,
yca eaep pe ay
cpee.
(4) Hae y AUDIO DUB a ye
ca ypae.
ee ap
X c a
pae caee.
(5) Hae y X a ye
ca ypae
pee ae cpeee
ya, p B xe aca. H
y ye aca pee cepe 2
(ST2) pe cpee.
(6) Hae y x a ye
ca ypae ece,
e B xe ca ac.

AUDIO DUB

Monitoring the new recorded


sound

op aca
ya

To play back the sound

cpee ya

Adjust the balance between the original sound


(ST1) and the new sound (ST2) by selecting
AUDIO MIX in the menu settings (p. 116).

Opeypye aac ey
epaa y (ST1)
y (ST2), pa ay AUDIO MIX
ycaax e (cp. 116).

VCR SET
H i F i SOUND
AUD I O M I X
A / V DV OUT ST1
NTSC PB
RETURN

[MENU] : END

106

ST2

Audio dubbing

Five minutes after when you disconnect the


power source or remove the battery pack, the
setting of AUDIO MIX returns to the original
sound (ST1) only. The factory setting is original
sound only.

epe y ce cee
ca a c aape
a ycaa AUDIO MIX epec
epaay yy (ST1). ac
yca ec epaa
y.

Notes
New sound cannot be recorded on a tape
already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz) (p. 120).
New sound cannot be recorded on a tape
already recorded in the LP mode.
You cannot add audio with the DV IN/OUT
jack (DCR-TRV20E only).

pea
H y e e aca a ey,
ye acay 16- pee
(32 , 44,1 48 ) (cp. 126).
H y e e aca a
ey, ye acay pee LP.
He a y c ea
DV IN/OUT (T e DCRTRV20E).

To add new sound more precisely


Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote
Commander at the point where you want to stop
recording later in the playback mode.
Carry out steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically
stops at the point where ZERO SET MEMORY
was pressed.
We recommend you to add new sound on a
tape recorded with your camcorder
If you add new sound on a tape recorded with
another camcorder (including DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E/TRV20E), the sound quality may
become worse.
If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to
lock
You cannot use the audio dubbing function. Slide
the write-protect tab to release the write
protection.
On blank portions
You cannot add an audio.

If i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (not


supplied) is connected to your camcorder
You cannot add a sound to a recorded tape.

Ec B ce cee
acae x ca ye e
ppe a py caa
ceye ceaec.
e MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
epae caex
paece
e AUDIO/VIDEO
Bcpe p

Editing

If you make all the connections


The audio input to be recorded will take
precedence over others in the following order.
MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack
Intelligent accessory shoe
AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Built-in microphone

Ec eaepe cee ae
i.LINK (cee ae DV) (e
x e)
B e cee a y a acay
ey.
ee ae
ya
Hae y ZERO SET MEMORY a
ye ca ypae
ece, e y a ac e
pee cpee.
Be y c 3 5. ac
aaec caaaec ece,
e ye aaa a ZERO SET MEMORY.
Peeyec a y a
ey, acay c Bae
eaep
Ec B ae y a ey, acay
c py eaep (a
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E/TRV20E), aec
ya e xye.
Ec a eec ycae
ee a ac
B e ee ca y
ayepeac. epee eec
a ac e a.
Ha eacae yac
He a y.

107

Superimposing a title

Haee pa

If you use a tape with cassette memory,


you can superimpose the title while
recording or after recording. When you
play back the tape, the title is displayed
for five seconds from the point where you
superimposed it.
You can select one of eight preset titles and two
custom titles (p. 112). You can also select the
colour, size and position of titles.

Ec B cyee ey c
acce a, B ee
aee pa pe
ac ce ac. Ec B
cpe ey, p ye
paac eee cey c
eca, e B a e.
B ee pa c
peape ycaex p
yx ccex p (cp. 112). B
ee ae pa e, paep
ee p.

VACATION

(1) In the standby, recording, playback or


playback pause mode, press TITLE to display
the title menu.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired title, then press the dial. The title is
flashing.
(4) Change the colour, size, or position, if
necessary.
1 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
the COLOUR, SIZE or POSITION, then
press the dial. The item appears.
2 Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
the desired item, then press the dial.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid
out as desired.
(5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial again to
complete the setting.
In the recording, playback or playback pause
mode:
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on
the screen for five seconds and the title is
set.
In the standby mode:
The TITLE indicator appears. And
when you press START/STOP to start
recording, TITLE SAVE appears on the
screen for five seconds and the title is set.

108

(1) B pee a, ac,


cpee ay
cpee ae y TITLE
pae e p.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa
, a ae ae a c.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y pa, a ae ae
a c. Tp ae a.
(4) ee e, paep ee
pa, ec y.
1 epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa COLOUR, SIZE POSITION, a
ae ae a c. c
ee.
2 epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y ya, a ae
ae a c.
3 pe y 1 2 ex p,
a p e ye pace
aea pa.
(5) Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC
aepe yca.
B pee ac, cpee
ay cpee:
Ha pae a cey c
ap TITLE SAVE, ycaa
pa ye aepea.
B pee a:
c ap TITLE. Ec B
aee y START/STOP
aaa ac, a pae a cey
c ap TITLE SAVE,
ycaa pa ye aepea.

Superimposing a title

Haee pa

PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END

TITLE

[T I TLE] : END

PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
[T I TLE] : END

SIZE

SMALL

SIZE

TITLE

VACATION

[EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END

TITLE

LARGE

PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
[T I TLE] : END

Editing

PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END
RETURN
[T I TLE] : END

VACATION
VACATION
[EXEC] : SAVE [T I TLE] : END

If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to


lock
You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide
the write-protect tab to release the write
protection.

Ec a eec ycae
ee a ac
B e cee aee
cpae pa. epee eec
a ac e a.

To use the custom title


If you want to use the custom title, select
step 2.

ca cce pa
Ec y ca cce p,
epe
ye 2.

in

If the tape has a blank portion


You cannot superimpose a title on the portion.
If the tape has a blank portion in the middle
of the recorded parts
The title may not be displayed correctly.
The titles superimposed with your camcorder
They are displayed by only the DV
format
video equipment with index titler function.
The point you superimposed the title may be
detected as an index signal when searching a
recording with other video equipment.

Ec a ee eec eaca
yac
B yace aee pa
e.
Ec a ee eec eaca
yac ey aca ac
Tp e paac epa.
Tp, aee c Bae
eaep
O paac c
eaapayp paa DV
c
ye ec ae p.
Mec ae pa e
apye ecy cay p
ce ac c py
eaapayp.

109

Superimposing a title

Haee pa

If the tape has too many index signals


You may not be able to superimpose a title
because the memory is full. In this case, delete
data you do not need.

Ec a accee aca c
ecx ca
Bep, aee p ye
e, cy p
epeee a. B cyae yae
eye ae.

Not to display titles


Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings
(p. 116).
Title setting
The title colour changes as follows :
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y
CYAN y GREEN y BLUE
The title size changes as follows :
SMALL y LARGE
You cannot input 13 characters or more for a
LARGE size.
The title position changes as follows :
If you select the title size SMALL, you have
nine choices for the title position.
If you select the title size LARGE, you have
eight choices for the title position.
One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, if
one title consists of 5 characters
However, if the cassette memory is full with date,
photo and cassette label data, one cassette can have
only up to about 11 titles with 5 characters each.
Cassette memory capacity is as follows:
6 date data (maximum)
12 photo data (maximum)
1 cassette label (maximum)
If the
FULL mark appears
The cassette memory is full. If you erase the title
in the cassette, you can label it.

e pae p
cae ay TITLE DSPL
ee OFF ycaax e (cp. 116).
caa pa
e pa eec cey
pa:
WHITE (e) y YELLOW (e) y
VIOLET (e) y RED (pac)
y CYAN (y) y GREEN (ee)
y BLUE (c)
Paep pa eec cey
pa:
SMALL (ae) y LARGE ()
p paepe e ec ee
13 c.
pa eec cey
pa:
Ec pa SMALL (ae) paep
pa, pa e
apa c pa.
Ec pa LARGE () paep
p, pa c
apa c pa.
Ha accee e eac 20
p, ec p cc 5
c
Oa, ec accea a ye
cep ay, ae acce
app, a accee e
eac 11 p c 5 ca
a.
Ec acce a ceya:
ae 6 a (acy)
ae 12 (acy)
1 accea appa (acy).
FULL
Ec ec c
accea a epeea. Ec cepe
p a accee, B cee ee
appy.

110

Superimposing a title

Haee pa

Erasing a title

Cpae pa

MENU

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
, a ae ae a c.
pa
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa TITLE ERASE, a ae ae a
c.
c a cpa pa.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa pa, p B xe cepe,
a ae ae a c.
c ap ERASE OK ?.
(6) eec, e p,
p B xe cepe, epe
c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
a ERASE, a ae ae a
c.

Editing

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)


/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
TITLEERASE, then press the dial.
Title erase display appears.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
title you want to erase, then press the dial.
ERASE OK ? indicator appears.
(6) Make sure the title is the one you want to
erase, and turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to
select ERASE, then press the dial.

3,4
CM SET
CM SEARCH
T I TLEERASE
T I TLE DSPL
TAPE T I TLE
ERASE ALL

CM SET
CM SEARCH
T I TLEERASE
T I TLE DSPL
TAPE T I TLE
ERASE ALL
RETURN

[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

5,6
MENU

T I TLE ERASE

1
2
3
4
5
6

4 PRESENT

HELLO !
CONGRATULAT I ONS !
HAPPY NEW YEAR !
PRESENT
GOOD MORN I NG
WEDD I NG

[MENU] : END

ERASE OK ?

RETURN
ERASE

[MENU] : END

To cancel erasing a title

e cpa pa

Select RETURN in step 6.

Bepe RETURN ye 6.

111

Making your own


titles

Cae Bax
ccex p
B ee cca yx p
cxpa x acce a.
oa p e cepa 20
c.

You can make up to two titles and store


them in the cassette memory. Each title
can have up to 20 characters.
(1) Press TITLE in the standby or VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
mode.
,
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
first line (CUSTOM1) or second line
(CUSTOM2), then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
column of the desired character, then press
the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired character, then press the dial.
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have selected
all characters and completed the title.
(7) To finish making your own titles, turn the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then
press the dial. The title is stored in memory.
(8) Press TITLE to make the title menu disappear.

TITLE

PRESET TITLE
HELLO!
HAPPY BIRTHDAY
HAPPY HOLIDAYS
CONGRATULATIONS!
OUR SWEET BABY
WEDDING
VACATION
THE END

[T I TLE] : END

(1) Hae y TITLE pee


a pee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/
PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa
, a ae ae a c.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa ep cp (CUSTOM1)
p cp (CUSTOM2), a ae
ae a c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa c y c, a
ae ae a c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y ca, a ae ae
a c.
(6) pe y 4 5 ex p, a
B e epe ce c c
e ccae p.
(7) aepe ccae cx
ccex p epe c SEL/
PUSH EXEC pa a [SET], a
ae ae a c. Tp ye
cxpae a.
(8) Hae y TITLE, ce
e p.

TITLE SET
CUSTOM1
CUSTOM2

TITLE SET
CUSTOM1
CUSTOM2
RETURN

[T I TLE] : END

[T I TLE] : END

TITLE SET
CUSTOM1
CUSTOM2
RETURN

TITLE SET

[T I TLE] : END

[T I TLE] : END

TITLE SET

TITLE SET

6
[T I TLE] : END

[T I TLE] : END

TITLE SET

[T I TLE] : END

112

TITLE SET
S

[T I TLE] : END

Making your own titles


To change a title you have stored
In step 3, select CUSTOM1 or CUSTOM2,
depending on which title you want to change,
then press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press
the dial to delete the title. The last character is
erased. Enter the new title as desired.

To enter a space
Select [
], then select the blank part.

B ye 3 epe ycay CUSTOM1


CUSTOM2, acc pa,
p B xe e, a ae
ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC. epe
c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa yca
[C], a ae ae a c yae
pa. ce c ye cep.
Bee y p.
Ec pee a c
aae ee y, a
accea axc eaepe
ae c aaec.
C, pe B e, cxpac
a eaep. cae caaa
epeae POWER ee OFF
(CHG), ae ca ee CAMERA,
ae c ya 1.
Peeyec yca epeae
POWER ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/
PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) y
accey, Baa eaepa
aaec e aac pe
a c pa.

To delete the title


Select [C]. The last character is erased.

ee cxpae
a pa

Editing

If you take five minutes or longer to enter


characters in the standby mode while a
cassette is in your camcorder
The power automatically goes off. The characters
you have entered remain stored in memory. Set
the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then
to CAMERA again, then proceed from step 1.
We recommend setting the POWER switch to
VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E) or removing the cassette so that your
camcorder does not automatically turn off while
you are entering title characters.

Cae Bax ccex


p

yae pa
Bepe [C]. ce c ye cep.
a pea
], ae epe ycy
Bepe [
ac.

113

Labelling a cassette

Mappa acce

If you use a tape with cassette memory,


you can label a cassette. The label can
consist of up to 10 characters and is stored
in cassette memory. When you insert the
labelled cassette and turn the power on,
the label is displayed for about five
seconds.
(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)
/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
TAPE TITLE, then press the dial. Tape title
display appears.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
column of the desired character, then press
the dial.
(7) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired character, then press the dial.
(8) Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you finish the label.
(9) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
[SET], then press the dial.
The label is stored in memory.

p ca e c acce
a, B ee
appy acce. Mappa
e cc 10 c
xpac a acce. Ec B
cae accey c app
e ae, appa
ye paac
cey.
(1) Bcae accey, py B xe
appa.
(2) cae epeae POWER
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
(3) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa
, a ae ae a c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca TAPE TITLE, a ae
ae a c. c paee
app e.
(6) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa c y c, a
ae ae a c.
(7) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y ca, a ae ae
a c.
(8) pe y 6 7 ex p, a
e aepe appy.
(9) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa a [SET], a ae ae
a c.
Mappa cxpaea a.

6-8
4,5

TAPE T I TLE

CM SET
CM SEARCH
T I TLEERASE
T I TLE DSPL
TAPE T I TLE
ERASE ALL
CM SET
CM SEARCH
T I TLEERASE
I TLE DSPL
[MENU] T: END
TAPE T I TLE
ERASE ALL
TAPE T I TLE

[MENU] : END

TAPE T I TLE

[MENU] : END

TAPE T I TLE

TAPE T I TLE

M
[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

114

[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

Labelling a cassette

Mappa acce

To erase a character

cpa ca

In step 6 turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select


[C], then press the dial. The last character is
erased.

B ye 6 epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC


pa yca [C], a ae ae
a c. ce c ye cep.

To change the label you have made

ee e
app

Insert the cassette to change the label, and


operate in the same way to make a new label.
If you set the write-protect tab of the tape to
lock
You cannot label it. Slide the write-protect tab to
release the write protection.

When the ----- indicator has fewer than 10


spaces
The cassette memory is full.
The ----- indicates the number of characters
you can select for the label.
To enter a space
Select [
], then select the blank part.

Ec ye 5 c c
accea a epeea. Ec cepe
p a accee, B cee ee
appy.

If you have superimposed titles in the cassette


When the label is displayed, up to 4 titles also
appear.

Ec a eec ycae
ee a ac
B e cee appy
acce. epee eec a
ac e a.

Editing

If the
mark appears in step 5
The cassette memory is full. If you erase the title
in the cassette, you can label it.

Bcae accey ee app


e e e ec, p
appe acce.

Ec B aee p a
accee
p pae app, c
ae 4 p.
Ec ap ----- ee eee 10
pe
accea a epeea.
ap ----- yaae ec
c, pe B ee pa
app.
a pea
Bepe [
], ae epe ycy
ac.

115

Customizing Your Camcorder

Bee yax yca a eaepe

Changing the menu


settings

eee yca
e

To change the mode settings in the menu


settings, select the menu items with the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial. The factory settings can be
partially changed. First, select the icon, then the
menu item and then the mode.

ee yca pea ycaax


e epe y e c ca SEL/
PUSH EXEC. ace yca y
ac ee. Caaa epe
pay, ae y e, a ae pe.

(1) In the standby, memory or VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)


mode, press MENU.
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired icon, then press the dial to set.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired item, then press the dial to set.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired mode, and press the dial to set.
(5) If you want to change other items, select
RETURN and press the dial, then repeat steps
from 2 to 4.
For details, see Selecting the mode setting of
each item (p. 117).

1
MENU

CAMERA

VCR/PLAYER

MANUAL SET
P EFFECT
WHT BAL
AUTO SHTR

MANUAL SET
P EFFECT

[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

(1) B pee a, a VCR


(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
ae MENU.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
y pa, a ae ae a c
e yca.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
y eea, a ae ae a c
e yca.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
y pea, a ae ae a c
e yca.
(5) Ec B xe e pye y,
RETURN, a ae
epe ay
ae a c, ce e pe
ec y c 2 4.
pe cee pee paee Bp
yca pea a eea (cp. 123).

OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
REC LAMP

OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
RETURN

MEMORY
MANUAL SET
WHT BAL

MANUAL SET
P EFFECT
WHT BAL

OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP

0 HR

0 HR

OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER ON
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
RETURN

[MENU] : END

OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER ON
DISPLAY
OFF
REC LAMP
RETURN

OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER ON
OFF
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
RETURN

OTHERS
WORLD TIME
BEEP
COMMANDER OFF
DISPLAY
REC LAMP
RETURN

116

Changing the menu settings

eee yca e

To make the menu display disappear

, cp a
e

Press MENU.

Hae y MENU.

English

y e paac e
peex e pa:
MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
VCR SET ( e DCRTRV20E)
PLAYER SET ( e DCRTRV6E/TRV11E)
LCD/VF SET
MEMORY SET ( e
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS

Selecting the mode setting of each item

z is the factory setting.

Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.


Icon/item

Mode

Meaning

POWER
switch

P EFFECT

To add special effects like those in films or on the


TV to images (p. 56).

CAMERA
VCR/
PLAYER

WHT BAL

To adjust the white balance (p. 49).

CAMERA
MEMORY

To automatically activate the electronic shutter


when shooting in bright conditions.

CAMERA

AUTO SHTR

z ON
OFF

D ZOOM

16:9WIDE

z OFF

To activate the digital zoom. More than 10 to 20


zoom is performed digitally (p. 27).

40

To activate the digital zoom. More than 10 to 40


zoom is performed digitally (p. 27).

z OFF
z ON
OFF

N.S. LIGHT

To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10 zoom is


carried out.

20

ON
STEADYSHOT

To not automatically activate the electronic shutter


even when shooting in bright conditions.

z ON
OFF

CAMERA

CAMERA

To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 51).


To compensate for camera-shake.

CAMERA

To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural pictures


are produced when shooting a stationary object
with a tripod.
To use the NightShot Light function (p. 31).
To cancel the NightShot Light function.

CAMERA
MEMORY

Notes on the SteadyShot function


The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.
Attachment of a conversion lens (not supplied) may influence the SteadyShot function.
If you cancel the SteadyShot function
The SteadyShot off indicator
appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive compensation for
camera-shake.

Customizing Your Camcorder

Menu items are displayed as the following


icons:
MANUAL SET
CAMERA SET
VCR SET (DCR-TRV20E only)
PLAYER SET (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E only)
LCD/VF SET
MEMORY SET (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
only)
CM SET
TAPE SET
SETUP MENU
OTHERS

117

Changing the menu settings

Icon/item
HiFi SOUND

POWER
switch

Mode

Meaning

z STEREO

To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track tape


with main and sub sound (p. 172).

To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or a


dual sound tape with main sound.

To play back a stereo tape with the right sound or a


dual sound track tape with sub sound.

AUDIO MIX

To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and


stereo 2 (p. 106).

A/VtDV OUT z OFF


(DCR-TRV20E only)

To output digital images and sound in analog


format using your camcorder.

ON

To output analog images and sound in digital


format using your camcorder.

ST1

NTSC PB

LCD B. L.

To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour


system on a PAL system TV.

NTSC 4.43

To play back a tape recorded in the NTSC colour


system on a TV with the NTSC 4.43 mode.

BRIGHT

LCD COLOUR

To set the brightness on the LCD screen normal.


To brighten the LCD screen.

To adjust the colour on the LCD screen, turn and


press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.

To get lowintensity
VF B.L.

z BRT NORMAL
BRIGHT

VCR/
PLAYER

ST2

z ON PAL TV

z BRT NORMAL

VCR/
PLAYER

To get highintensity

To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to


normal.
To brighten the viewfinder screen.

VCR

VCR/
PLAYER

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

Note on the playback of the NTSC tapes


When you play back a tape on a Multi System TV, select the best mode while viewing the picture on
the TV.
Notes on LCD B.L.
When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during recording.
When you use power sources other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically selected.
Note on VF B.L.
When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during recording.

118

Changing the menu settings

Icon/item
*1)

Mode

CONTINUOUS z OFF

QUALITY

IMAGE SIZE*2)
PRINT MARK

To record pictures continuously (p. 140).

MULTI SCRN

To record nine still picutures continuously (p. 140).

z SUPER FINE*2)

To record still pictures in the fine image quality


mode, using the Memory Stick (p. 134).

STANDARD

To record still pictures in the standard image


quality mode, using the Memory Stick (p. 134).
To record still pictures with 1152864 size (p. 136).

640480

To record still pictures with 640480 size (p. 136).

ON

To write a print mark on the recorded still images


you want to print out later.

ON

To erase print marks on still pictures.


To protect selected still pictures against accidental
erasure (p. 164).

MEMORY

VCR/
PLAYER
MEMORY

MEMORY
VCR/
PLAYER
MEMORY

Not to protect still pictures.

SLIDE SHOW

To play back images in a continuous loop (p. 162).

MEMORY

DELETE ALL

To delete all the unprotected images (p. 167).

MEMORY

To cancel formatting.

MEMORY

z RETURN
OK

PHOTO SAVE

To format an inserted Memory Stick. 1. Select


FORMAT with the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial, then
press the dial. 2. Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to
select OK, then press the dial. 3. After EXECUTE
appears, press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
FORMATTING flashes during formatting.
COMPLETE appears when formatting is finished.
To duplicate mini DV still pictures on Memory
Sticks (p. 152).

VCR/
PLAYER

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only
DCR-TRV20E only

Note on IMAGE SIZE (DCR-TRV20E only):


When you set CONTINUOUS to MULTI SCRN or you set the POWER switch to VCR, IMAGE SIZE is
automatically set to 640480.
Notes on formatting
Supplied Memory Sticks have been formatted at factory. Formatting with this camcorder is not
required.
Do not turn the POWER switch or press any button while the display shows FORMATTING.
You cannot format the Memory Stick if the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
Format again if the message appears.
Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick
Check the contents of the Memory Stick before formatting.
Formatting erases sample images on the Memory Stick.
Formatting erases the protected image data on the Memory Stick.

Customizing Your Camcorder

z 1152864

POWER
switch

VCR/
PLAYER
MEMORY

FORMAT

*2)

To record still pictures in the super fine image


quality mode, using the Memory Stick (p. 134).

FINE

z OFF

*1)

Not to record continuously.

ON*2)

z OFF
PROTECT

Meaning

119

Changing the menu settings

Icon/item
CM SEARCH

Mode

Meaning

z ON

To search using cassette memory (p. 73).

OFF
TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

z ON
OFF

To search without using cassette memory.

POWER
switch
VCR/
PLAYER

To erase the title you have superimposed (p. 111).

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

To display the title you have superimposed.

VCR/
PLAYER

Not to display the title.

TAPE TITLE

To label a cassette (p. 114).

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

ERASE ALL

To erase all the data in cassette memory.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

REC MODE

AUDIO MODE

z SP
LP

To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the SP


mode.

z 12BIT

To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds).

16BIT

To record in the 16-bit mode (the one stereo sound


with high quality).

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

Notes on the LP mode


When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing the tape on your
camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or VCRs, noise may occur in pictures
or sound.
When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/Master mini DV cassette
so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.
You cannot make audio dubbing on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the tape to
be audio dubbed.
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in the LP mode, the
playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly between scenes.
Notes on AUDIO MODE
You cannot dub audio sound on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in AUDIO MIX.

120

Changing the menu settings

Icon/item

Meaning

q REMAIN

z AUTO

To display the remaining tape bar:


for about 8 seconds after your camcorder is
turned on and calculates the remaining amount
of tape.
for about 8 seconds after a cassette is inserted and
your camcorder calculates the remaining amount
of tape.
for about 8 seconds after N is pressed in VCR
(DCR-TRV 20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E) mode.
for about 8 seconds after DISPLAY is pressed to
display the screen indicators.
for the period of tape rewinding, forwarding or
picture search in the PLAYER mode.

DATA CODE

z DATE/CAM

ON

DATE
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

To always display the remaining tape indicator.


To display date, time and various settings during
playback.

VCR/
PLAYER

To display date and time during playback.


To reset the date or time (p. 129).

CAMERA
MEMORY

To display selected menu items in normal size.


To display selected menu items at twice the normal
size.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

z ON

To make the demonstration appear.

CAMERA

OFF

To cancel the demonstration mode.

z NORMAL
2

DEMO MODE

POWER
switch

Notes on DEMO MODE


You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.
DEMO MODE is set to STBY (Standby) at the factory and the demonstration starts about 10 minutes
after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a cassette inserted.
Note that you cannot select STBY of DEMO MODE in the menu settings.
When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, the NIGHTSHOT indicator appears on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.

Customizing Your Camcorder

Mode

121

Changing the MENU settings

Icon/item

Mode

WORLD TIME

BEEP

COMMANDER

z MELODY

To output the melody when you start/stop


recording or when an unusual condition occurs on
your camcorder.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

To output the beep instead of the melody.


To cancel the melody and beep sound.

z LCD
V-OUT/LCD

REC LAMP

CAMERA
MEMORY

OFF
z ON

z ON
OFF

POWER
switch

To set the clock to the local time. Turn the SEL/


PUSH EXEC dial to set a time difference. The clock
changes by the time difference you set here. If you
set the time difference to 0, the clock returns to the
originally set time.

NORMAL

OFF

DISPLAY

Meaning

To activate the Remote Commander supplied with


your camcorder.
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid
remote control misoperation caused by other VCRs
remote control.
To show the display on the LCD screen and in the
viewfinder.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

To show the display on the TV screen, LCD screen


and in the viewfinder.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

To light up the camera recording lamp at the front


of your camcorder.

CAMERA
MEMORY

To turn the camera recording lamp off so that the


person is not aware of the recording.

VIDEO EDIT

To make programmes and perform video editing


(p. 93).

VCR/
PLAYER

EDIT SET

To adjust and set the synchronicity of your


camcorder and a VCR for dubbing in edit set mode.

VCR/
PLAYER

Note
If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings, the picture from a TV
or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when your camcorder is connected to outputs on the
TV or VCR.
When recording a close subject
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the camcorder may
reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend you set REC LAMP to OFF.
In more than five minutes after removing the power source
The AUDIO MIX, COMMANDER, HiFi SOUND, and WHT BAL items are returned to their
factory settings.
The other menu items are held in memory even when the battery is removed.

122

MENU
Pycc

Bp yca pea ay yy z aca ycaa.


y e ac acc e epeae POWER.
/

Haaee

epeae
POWER

P EFFECT

ae ceax e,
pae ax a
paax eep (cp. 56).

CAMERA
VCR/
PLAYER

WHT BAL

peyp aaca e (cp. 49).

CAMERA
MEMORY

aaec cpaaa
ep apa p cee px
ycx.

CAMERA

AUTO SHTR

z ON

OFF

16:9WIDE

z OFF

20

aa p pacapa.
Hae eaep peeax 10 20
ec p e (cp. 27).

40

aa p pacapa.
Hae eaep peeax 10 40
ec p e (cp. 27).

z OFF
ON

STEADYSHOT

z ON
OFF

N.S. LIGHT

e p paca.
Hae eaep 10 ec
ec cc.

z ON
OFF

CAMERA

CAMERA

ac ppa pae 16:9


(cp. 51).
eca paa eaep.

CAMERA

e y yc ce. p
cee caap ea c
aa yac e ececee
pae.
ca y ce
ce (cp. 31).

CAMERA
MEMORY

e y ce
ce.

pea y yc ce
y yc ce e cc ecpa peepe paae
eaep.
cae pepaae ea (e paaec) e a
y yc ce.
Ec B ee y yc ce
c ap SteadyShot OFF
. Baa eaepa e ye ecpa
paae.

Customizing Your Camcorder

D ZOOM

, ep ap e
cpaaa aaec ae p cee
px ycx.

123

MENU

paa/y
HiFi SOUND

z STEREO

cpee cepeec e
e e c p ya c
c cae y (cp. 172).

cpee cepeec e
c y e aaa e e
ya c c y.

cpee cepeec e
c y pa aaa e e
ya c cae y.
peyp aaca ey
cepeec aa 1
cepeec aa 2 (cp. 106).

AUDIO MIX

ST1
A/VtDV OUT
(
e DCRTRV20E)

z OFF

NTSC PB

z ON PAL TV

ON

NTSC 4.43

LCD B. L.

z BRT NORMAL
BRIGHT

a c eaep px
pae ya aa pae.

BRIGHT

VCR/
PLAYER

VCR

a c eaep aax
pae ya p pae.
cpee e, aca a
eaepe, ccee e eee
NTSC a eepe cce PAL.

VCR/
PLAYER

cpee e, aca
ccee e eee NTSC, a
eepe c cce NTSC 4.43.
yca pa pc a pae
.
ee p paa .

Meee ec

z BRT NORMAL

VCR/
PLAYER

ST2

peyp ea a pae
epe ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.

LCD COLOUR

VF B.L.

POWER

Haaee

ee ec

yca pa pc
caee.
ee p pae caee.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

peae cpee e NTSC


p cpee e a ycce eepe epe ay pe
pe pcpa pae a pae eepa.
pea pea LCD B.L.
Ec B epe ycay BRIGHT, cp cy aape a cpac
pep a 10% p ac.
p ca c a, x aape a, aaec
ye paa ycaa BRIGHT.
peae pea VF B.L.
Ec B epe ycay BRIGHT, cp cy aape a cpac pep
124 a 10% p ac.

MENU

/
*1)

CONTINUOUS

QUALITY

IMAGE SIZE*2)

Haaee

z OFF

, e epepy ac.

ON*2)

epep ac pae (cp. 140).

MULTI SCRN

epep ac e pae
(cp. 140).

z SUPER FINE*2)

FINE

ac ex pae pee
c aeca c cae Memory Stick
(cp. 134).

STANDARD

ac ex pae pee
caap aeca c cae Memory
Stick (cp. 134).

z 1152864

ac ex pae paepa
640480 (cp. 136).

ON

ac ea e a acae
pae, pe ex paceaa
e.

ON
z OFF

VCR/
PLAYER
MEMORY

MEMORY

VCR/
PLAYER
MEMORY

yae ea e a ex
paex.
a pax ex pae
cya cpa (cp. 164).
e a ex pae.

VCR/
PLAYER
MEMORY

cpee pae epepy


y (cp. 162).

MEMORY

DELETE ALL

yae cex eaex pae


(cp. 167).

MEMORY

e papa.

MEMORY

z RETURN
OK

PHOTO SAVE

*2)

MEMORY

SLIDE SHOW

FORMAT

*1)

ac ex pae paepa
1152864 (cp. 136).

640480

z OFF
PROTECT

ac ex pae pee
ca c aeca c y
Memory Stick (cp. 134).

POWER

papa cae Memory Stick. 1.


Bepe FORMAT c ca SEL/PUSH EXEC,
ae ae a c. 2. epe c SEL/PUSH
EXEC pa yca OK, a ae ae a
c. 3. ce e a EXECUTE
ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC. B pe
papa ae a FORMATTING.
ce aepe papa c a
COMPLETE.
epeca ex pae c DV
a Memory Stick (cp. 152).

VCR/
PLAYER

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
e DCR-TRV20E

peae IMAGE SIZE (T e DCR-TRV20E):


Ec aa CONTINUOUS ycaea ee MULTI SCRN epeae POWER ycae
ee VCR, apaepa IMAGE SIZE aaec ycaaaec aee 640480.
pea papa
Bxe e ap Memory Stick papa a ae. papae a
eaepe e peyec.
He ae epeae POWER e aae pe pae a
FORMATTING.
B e cee papa Memory Stick, ec eec a ac a Memory Stick
ycae ee LOCK.
Ec c cee
, e papae ee pa.
B pe papa yaec c pa a Memory Stick
epe papae pepe cepe Memory Stick.
B pe papa yac ce pep pae a Memory Stick.
B pe papa yac ce ae aex pae a Memory Stick.

Customizing Your Camcorder

PRINT MARK

125

MENU

/
CM SEARCH

z ON
OFF

TITLEERASE

TITLE DSPL

z ON
OFF

Haaee
ca c acce a
(cp. 73).

POWER
VCR/
PLAYER

ca e acce a.
yae ae pa (cp. 111).

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

pae ae pa.

VCR/
PLAYER

, e paa p.

TAPE TITLE

app acce (cp. 114).

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

ERASE ALL

yae cex ax acce


a.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

ac pee SP (caape
cpeee).

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

REC MODE

z SP
LP

AUDIO MODE

z 12BIT
16BIT

yee pee ac 1,5 paa


cpae c pe SP.
ac 12- pee (a
cepeecx ya).
ac 16- pee (
cepeec caece y).

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

pea pey LP
Ec ac e ac a Bae eaepe pee LP, ee peeyec
cp a eaepe. p cpee e a pyx eaepax
eaax, paee y y c exa.
p e ac pee LP peeyec ca acce Sony Excellence/
Master DV, y acay ay Bae eaep.
B e ee ayepeac a ee, aca pee LP. e, a
p ye c ayepeac, cye pe SP.
Ec ac a ee ec peax SP LP epe acac
pee LP, cpe paee e cae pee
epa aca ey a.
pea pey AUDIO MODE
He ayepeac a ee, aca 16- pee.
p cpee e 16- pee B e ee peypa aac
ycae AUDIO MIX.

126

MENU

/
q REMAIN

z AUTO

DATA CODE

z DATE/CAM
DATE

CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE

z NORMAL
2

DEMO MODE

z ON
OFF

pae apa caec


e:
pe eee 8 cey ce
e eaep peee
caec eca a ee.
pe eee 8 cey ce
yca acce peee
eaep caec eca a ee.
8 cey ce aa N
pee VCR (DCR-TRV 20E)/PLAYER (DCRTRV6E/TRV11E).
8 cey ce aa
DISPLAY pae pax
ap.
pe ycpe epe e aa,
epe ca pae pee
PLAYER.

POWER
VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA

c pae apa
caec e.
pae a, pee pax
yca pe cpee

VCR/
PLAYER

pae a pee pe
cpee.
epeyca a pee (cp. 129).

CAMERA
MEMORY

pae pax y e c
paep.
pae pax y e
paep e e .

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

, ac ecpa.

CAMERA

e pea ecpa.

pea pey DEMO MODE


B e ee pa ay DEMO MODE, ec eaepy caea accea.
aa DEMO MODE ycaea ee STBY (ae) a pepee, pe ecpa aec pep epe 10 y ce yca
epeae POWER ee CAMERA p cyc aepe acce.
Opae ae a , B e ee pa ee STBY a DEMO MODE
ycaax e.
Ec aa NIGHTSHOT ycaea ee ON, a pae
caee c ap NIGHTSHOT, a ycaax e ye pa
ay DEMO MODE.

Customizing Your Camcorder

ON

Haaee

127

MENU

/
WORLD TIME

BEEP

COMMANDER

z MELODY

a e y caa p
ayce/cae ac ea
cya p pae eaep.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

OFF

e e yep
ca.

z LCD
V-OUT/LCD

REC LAMP

CAMERA
MEMORY

a yep caa ec
e.

z ON

z ON
OFF

POWER

yca ac a ece pe.


epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC yca
pa pee. aee pee
ec acc ycae
pa. Ec B ycae pay
pee a 0, ac epyc epaa
ycaey pee.

NORMAL

OFF

DISPLAY

Haaee

e ya ca
ypae, cae c eaep.
e ya ca
ypae eae e epa
cpaaa, a pa ya
ypae py eaa.
pae a a pae
caee.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

pae a a pae
eepa, pae caee.

VCR/
PLAYER
CAMERA
MEMORY

e a ac a epee
ae eaep.

CAMERA
MEMORY

e a ac,
ee, p B caee, e a
cee.

VIDEO EDIT

ccae ppa cyece


eaa (cp. 93).

VCR/
PLAYER

EDIT SET

acp e pea
cxpc eaep
eaa p epeac pee
eaa.

VCR/
PLAYER

peae
p aa DISPLAY, a aa DISPLAY ycaea ee V-OUT/LCD
ycaax e, paee c eepa eaa e c a pae
, ae ec eaepa ceea xa eepa eaa.
p ac pace ea
Ec aa REC LAMP ycaea ee ON, paca aa ac a epee
ae eaep e paac a ee, ec pace aepe. B
y cyae peeyec yca ay REC LAMP ee OFF.
Ec ce e a p ee y
apaep AUDIO MIX, COMMANDER, HiFi SOUND WHT BAL epyc ac
ycaa.
pye yca e yy caac a, ae p ee aape a.

128

Resetting the date


and time

epeycaa a
pee

The clock is set at the factory to London time for


United Kingdom to Paris time for the other
European countries.
If you do not use your camcorder for about four
months, the date and time settings may be
released (bars may appear) because the
vanadium-lithium battery installed in your
camcorder will have been discharged (p. 196).
First, set the year, then the month, the day, the
hour and then the minute.

Ha pep-ee ac
ycae a ce pe
ee, caex Bepa,
a apce pe pyx epecx
ee.
Ec eaepa e caac
epex ece, yca a pee
y cey (c ep),
cy aae-ea aapea,
ycaea eaepe, papc.
(cp. 196).
Caaa ycae , ae ec, e,
ac yy.

1,
7

(1) B pee a ae y
MENU pae e.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
, a ae ae a
pa yca
c.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa a CLOCK SET, a ae
ae a c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y a, a ae ae a
c.
(5) paa c SEL/PUSH EXEC
aa a e, ycae ec, e
ac.
(6) cae y, paa c
SEL/PUSH EXEC aa a e
e epea caa
pee. ac ay ypa.
(7) Hae y MENU ,
ypa e.

MENU

MANUAL SET
P EFFECT
WHT BAL
AUTO SHTR

SETUP MENU
1 1 2000
CLOCK SET
12:00:00
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN

SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
2000
DEMO MODE
RETURN

[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

12 00

6
4
SETUP MENU
CLOCK SET
LTR SIZE
2000
DEMO MODE
RETURN

SETUP MENU
4 7 2000
CLOCK SET
17:30:00
LTR SIZE
DEMO MODE
RETURN

Customizing Your Camcorder

(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display


the menu.
,
(2) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
then press the dial.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
CLOCK SET, then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the
desired year, then press the dial.
(5) Set the month, day and hour by turning the
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial.
(6) Set the minute by turning the SEL/PUSH
EXEC dial and pressing the dial by the time
signal. The clock starts to move.
(7) Press MENU to make the menu disappear.

17 30

2000

2000

1
[MENU] : END

12 00

[MENU] : END

12 00

129

Resetting the date and time

epeycaa a pee

The year changes as follows:

eec cey pa:

1995 y 2000 T t 2079

130

If you do not set the date and time


: : is recorded on the data code of the
tape and the Memory Stick (DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E only.)

Ec B e ycae ay pe
Ha ee Memory Stick ye acaa
a : : ( e DCRTRV11E/TRV20E).

Note on the time indicator


The internal clock of your camcorder operates on
a 24-hour cycle.

peae apy pee


Bcpee ac Bae eaep
paa 24-ac pee.

Memory Stick operations

Oepa c Memory Stick

Using a Memory
Stickintroduction

cae Memory
Stick Beee

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

You can record and play back still images on a


Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder.
You can easily play back, record or delete still
images. You can exchange image data with other
equipment such as a personal computer etc.,
using the PC serial cable for Memory Stick
supplied with your camcorder or PC card
adaptor for Memory Stick (not supplied).

B ee aca cp
ee pae a Memory
Stick, paae Bae eaepe. B
e ee cpeee,
epeac yaee ex
pae. B ee pcapa
pae a py aapaype,
apep, epca epe ..,
cy ae ceae
epeca Memory Stick, p
caec c eaep, aaep
PC card Memory Stick (e paaec).

On file format (JPEG)


Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG
format (extension .jpg).

Using a Memory Stick

Oe aa ax pae
100-0001: aa ec a pae
caee eaep.
DSC00001.jpg: Tae aa ec
a pe Bae .

cae Memory Stick


Terminal/a paea

Write-protect tab/

You cannot record or erase still images when


the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is
set to LOCK.
We recommend backing up important data.
Image data may be damaged in the following
cases:
If you remove the Memory Stick or turn the
power off while reading or writing.
If you use the Memory Sticks near magnets
or magnet fields.
Prevent metallic objects or your finger from
coming into contact with the metal parts of the
connecting section.
Stick its label on the labelling position.
Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to
Memory Sticks.
Do not disassemble or modify Memory Sticks.

B e ee aca cpa
ee pae, ec eec
a ac a Memory Stick
ycae ee LOCK.
Bae ae peeyec pa.
ae pae y
pee ceyx cyax:
Ec B eaee Memory Stick
aee ae pe e
ac.
Ec B cyee Memory Stick p
c aa ca ax
e.
He pacaec eaec ac
aa eaec ac
ceex ce.
ey ceye ppe
app.
He cae, e pe e pce
Memory Stick.
He papae e ce ee
cpy Memory Stick.

Oepa c Memory Stick

Labelling position/ app

Memory Stick operations

Typical image data file name


100-0001: This file name appears on the LCD
screen or in the viewfinder of your camcorder.
DSC00001.jpg: This file name appears on the
display of your personal computer.

O pae a (JPEG)
Baa eaepa cae ae
pae pa JPEG (c pacpee
.jpg).

131

Using a Memory Stick


introduction

cae Memory Stick


Beee

Do not let Memory Sticks get wet.


Do not use or keep Memory Sticks in
locations that are:
Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the
sun or under the scorching sun.
Under direct sunlight.
Very humid or subject to corrosive gases.
When you carry or store a Memory Stick, put
it in its case.

He ycae aa a a Memory Stick.


He cye e xpae Memory Stick:
B c apx ecax, apep,
ae, papa ce
ece, a ce.
Ha ce.
B e ax ecax ecax,
epex ec apeccx a.
p epece xpae ex
Memory Stick yp.

Formatting the supplied Memory


Stick

papae paae Memory


Stick

Formatting with this camcorder is not required.


The Memory Stick has been formatted in the
FAT-format at factory.

papae a eaepe e
peyec. Memory Stick papaa
pae FAT a pep-ee.

Memory Stick supplied with your camcorder


Sample images are recorded in the Memory
Stick (p. 148). Note that these images will be
deleted if you format the Memory Stick.
Stick the supplied label on the labelling
position to prevent the accidental erasure. As
for the labelling position, see the illustration on
the previous page.

Memory Stick, paaea Bae


eaepe
pep pae aca a Memory Stick
(cp. 148). Ceye , pae
yy yae, ec B papyee Memory
Stick.
ppee paaey aey
app pepae cya
cpa. ye cee
app c. pcy a peye cpae.

Memory Sticks formatted by a


computer
Memory Sticks formatted by Windows OS or
Macintosh computers do not have a guaranteed
compatibility with this camcorder.
Notes on image data compatibility
Image data files recorded on Memory Sticks
by your camcorder conform with the Design
Rules for Camera File Systems universal
standard established by the JEIDA (Japan
Electronic Industry Development Association).
You cannot play back on your camcorder still
images recorded on other equipment (DCRTRV890E/TRV900/TRV900E or DSC-D700/
D770) that does not conform with this universal
standard. (These models are not sold in some
areas.)
If you cannot use the Memory Stick that is
used with other equipment, format it with this
camcorder (p. 119). However, formatting erases
all information on the Memory Stick.
Memory Stick and
are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
Windows is registered trademark licensed to
Microsoft Corporation, registered in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
All other product names mentioned herein may
be the trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
Furthermore, and are not mentioned
in each case in this manual.

132

Memory Stick, papae a


epe
Memory Stick, papae c
ep, cyx epay ccey
Windows Macintosh, e aa
apapa cecc c a
eaep.
pea cecc ax
pae
a ax pae, acae
eaep a Memory Stick, cecy
yepcay caapy cac paa
pepa ax cce
eaep, ycaey accae JEIDA
(c accae pa ep
pec).
B e ee cp a Bae
eaepe ee pae,
acae a py aapaype (DCR-TRV890E/
TRV900/TRV900E DSC-D700/D770), pa e
eae y yepcay caapy. (
e e pac epx acx.)
Ec B e cee ca Memory Stick,
pe cyc a py aapaype,
papye x c eaep
(cp. 125). Oa papae ya c
pa a Memory Stick.
Memory Stick
c p apa
ppa Sony.
Windows ec apecppa p
ap, paeae ppa Microsoft
Corporation, apecppa CA pyx
cpaax.
Bce pye aea py, yye
yee, y p apa
apecppa p apa
cecyx a.
pe , a e yac
a cyae a pyce.

Using a Memory Stick


introduction
Inserting a Memory Stick
(1) Slide MEMORY OPEN in the direction of the
arrow. The Memory Stick compartment
opens.
(2) Insert a Memory Stick in as far as it can go
with its rounded corner facing up.
Then, close the Memory Stick compartment.

cae Memory Stick


Beee
caa Memory Stick
(1) epee y MEMORY OPEN
apae cpe. Opec ce
Memory Stick.
(2) Bcae Memory Stick ypa,
cpye y pae epx.
ae ape ce Memory Stick.

Access lamp/
MEMORY OPEN
aa pae

Ejecting a Memory Stick

Ope ce Memory Stick ye


1, ae y MEMORY RELEASE.
Memory Stick e cea.

MEMORY RELEASE

When the access lamp is lit or flashing


Never shake or strike your camcorder. Do not
turn the power off , eject a Memory Stick or
remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image
data breakdown may occur.

Oepa c Memory Stick

Open the Memory Stick compartment in step 1,


press MEMORY RELEASE. The Memory Stick
comes out.

eee Memory Stick

Memory Stick operations

Memory Stick compartment/


Oce Memory Stick

Ec aa pae p
ae
Ha e pce eaepy e
cye e. He ae ae, e
eae Memory Stick cea e
yae aape . B p
cyae ae pae y
pee.

133

Using a Memory Stick


introduction

cae Memory Stick


Beee

Selecting image quality mode


You can select image quality mode in still picture
recording. Image quality is set to SUPER FINE
mode at the factory.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the
left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
QUALITY, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired image quality, then press the dial.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee MEMORY VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae ee ee
(papa).
(2) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca
, a ae ae a
c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca QUALITY, a ae
ae a c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa eae aeca pae,
a ae ae a c.

OFF(CHG)

POW

B ee pa pe aeca
pae p ac e
pae. Ha pep-ee
aec pae peape
ycae pe SUPER FINE.

VCR

Bp pea aeca
pae

ER

MEMORY

CAMERA

5
2

MENU

Note
In some cases, changing the image quality mode
may not affect the image quality, depending on
the types of images you are shooting.

134

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
SUPER FINE
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

STD
SUPER F I NE
F I NE
STANDARD

peae
B epx cyax ee pea
aeca pae e e pac
a aece pae, acc
a pae, cey px B
pe.

Using a Memory Stick


introduction

cae Memory Stick


Beee

Image quality mode

Pe aeca pae

Setting

Meaning

SUPER FINE
(SFN)
(DCR-TRV20E
only)

This is the highest image


quality in your
camcorder. The number
of still images you can
record is less than that in
FINE mode. The image is
compressed to about 1/3.
SFN appears on the screen.

FINE (FINE)

Use this mode when you


want to record high
quality images. The
image is compressed to
about 1/6. FINE appears on
the screen.

1152864 image size (DCR-TRV20E only)

ayee
aec pae
eaepe.
ec ex
pae, pe
aca, ye
ee, e p ycae
FINE. paee
caec pep 1/3.
Ha pae ec SFN.

FINE (FINE)

cye pe,
ec B xe aca
caecee
pae. paee
caec pep 1/6.
Ha pae ec FINE.

STANDARD (STD) cecye


caapy aecy
pae. paee
caec pep
1/10. Ha pae ec
STD.
O pee aeca pae
epe cxpaee a acae
pae cac pae JPEG.
Oe a, ee a
pae, eec acc
pa pea aeca pae.
pc cepac pee
e ae. (M pa paep
1152864 640480 ycaax e.)
Paep pae 1152864 (
e DCR-TRV20E)

Image quality mode

Memory capacity

SUPER FINE

About 600 KB

FINE

About 300 KB

Pe aeca
pae

Ec a

STANDARD

About 200 KB

SUPER FINE

O 600

FINE

O 300

STANDARD

O 200

640480 image size


Image quality mode

Memory capacity

SUPER FINE
(DCR-TRV20E only)

About 190 KB

FINE

About 100 KB

STANDARD

About 60 KB

Oepa c Memory Stick

Differences in image quality mode


Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format
before being stored in memory. The memory
capacity allotted to each image varies depending
on the selected image quality mode and image
size. Details are shown in the table below. (You
can select 1152864 or 640480 image size in the
menu settings.)

Haaee

SUPER FINE
(SFN)
(
e
DCR-TRV20E)

Memory Stick operations

STANDARD (STD) This is the standard


image quality. The
image is compressed to
about 1/10. STD appears on
the screen.

caa

Paep pae 640480

Image quality mode indicator


The image quality mode indicator is not
displayed during playback.

Pe aeca
pae

Ec a

SUPER FINE
O 190
( e
DCR-TRV20E)
FINE

O 100

STANDARD

O 60

ap pea aeca pae


ap pea aeca pae e
paaec pe cpee.

135

Using a Memory Stick


introduction
Selecting image size

cae Memory Stick


Beee
Bp paepa pae

DCR-TRV20E only

e DCR-TRV20E

You can select either one of two image sizes:


1152864 or 640480. (In VCR mode, you can
select only 640480.)

B ee pa yx paep
pae: 1152864 640480. (B
pee VCR, pa
640480.)

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.


Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to
the left (unlock) position.
(2)Press MENU to display the menu.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(4)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
IMAGE SIZE, then press the dial.
(5)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
the desired image size, then press the dial.
The indicator changes as follows;

1152

640

(1)cae epeae POWER


ee MEMORY.
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae ee ee
(papa).
(2)Hae y MENU
pae e.
(3)epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
, a ae ae
pa yca
a c.
(4)epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa IMAGE SIZE, a ae ae
a c.
(5)epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa y paepa pae,
ae ae a c.
ap ye ec cey
pa;

1152

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

CAMERA

5
2
136

MENU

640
MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE 1 1 5 2 8 6 4
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
640
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE 1 1 5 2 8 6 4
PR I NT MARK 6 4 0 480
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

Using a Memory Stick


introduction

cae Memory Stick


Beee

Image size settings/ca paep pae


Setting/
caa

Meaning/
Haaee

Indicator/ap

1152864

Records 1152864 still images./


ac 1152864 - ee
pae

640480

Records 640480 still images./


ac 640480 - ee
pae

Recording/
ac

Note
When images recorded on a camcorder in 1152864
size are played back on a unit that does not support
that size, the full image may not appear.

1152

SFN

1152

640

SFN

640

peae
Ec pae, acae a eaepe,
paepa 1152864 cpc a
ycpce, pe e epae
paep, paee e paac e
ee.
pee ec pae,
pe B ee aca a Memory
Stick
ec pae, pe
aca eec acc pa
pea aeca pae, e paepa
cc ea.
1152864 SUPER FINE pac
e DCR-TRV20E.

4MB type (supplied):/4-M (paaec):


Image size/Paep pae

640 480

1152 864

SUPER FINE (SFN)


FINE (FINE )
STANDARD (STD)

20 images/20 pae
40 images/40 pae
60 images/60 pae

6 images/6 pae
12 images/12 pae
18 images/18 pae

Image size/Paep pae

640 480

1152 864

SUPER FINE (SFN)


FINE (FINE )
STANDARD (STD)

40 images/40 pae
81 images/81 pae
122 images/122 pae

12 images/12 pae
25 images/25 pae
37 images/37 pae

16MB type (not supplied):/16-M (e paaec):


Image size/Paep pae

640 480

1152 864

SUPER FINE (SFN)


FINE (FINE )
STANDARD (STD)

82 images/82 pae
164 images/164 pae
246 images/246 pae

25 images/25 pae
51 images/51 pae
75 images/75 pae

Oepa c Memory Stick

8MB type (not supplied):/8-M (e paaec):

Memory Stick operations

Approximate number of images you can


record on a Memory Stick
The number of images you can record varies
depending on which image quality mode and image
size you select and the complexity of the subject.
1152864 image size and SUPER FINE are
selected with DCR-TRV20E only.

Playback/
Bcpeee

32MB type (not supplied):/32-M (e paaec):


Image size/Paep pae

640 480

1152 864

SUPER FINE (SFN)


FINE (FINE )
STANDARD (STD)

164 images/164 pae


329 images/329 pae
494 images/494 pae

52 images/52 pae
104 images/104 pae
152 images/152 pae

64MB type (not supplied):/64-M (e paaec):


Image size/Paep pae

640 480

1152 864

SUPER FINE (SFN)


FINE (FINE )
STANDARD (STD)

329 images/329 pae


659 images/659 pae
988 images/988 pae

104 images/104 pae


208 images/208 pae
304 images/304 pae

137

Recording still images on


Memory Sticks
Memory Photo recording

ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

You can record still pictures on Memory Sticks.

M ac ex
pae a Memory Stick.

Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left
(unlock) position.
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the
desired still picture appears. The green z
mark stops flashing, then lights up. The
brightness of the picture and focus are
adjusted, being targeted for the middle of the
picture and are fixed. Recording does not start
yet.
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed
on the screen will be recorded on a Memory
Stick. Recording is complete when the bar
scroll indicator disappears.

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae ee
ee (papa).
(2) epe cea aa y PHOTO
ex p, a e c peyee
ee paee. eea
ea z pepa a ae
apc. pc pae
ycpa acpaac epy
pae cpyc. ac a
e aec.
(3) Hae y PHOTO cee.
paee, paaee a pae,
ye aca a Memory Stick. ac
ye aepea, a cee
ap e c.

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

1 / 100
CAPTURE

PHOTO

[b]

[a] Number of images can be recorded on the


Memory Stick
[b] Number of recorded images

138

CAMERA

[a]

3
PHOTO

[a] ec pae, pe e
aca a Memory Stick
[b] ec acax pae

Recording still images on


Memory Sticks
Memory Photo recording

ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a

When the POWER switch is set to MEMORY


The following functions do not work:
Wide TV mode
Digital zoom
SteadyShot function
SUPER NIGHTSHOT
Fader
Picture effect
Digital effect
Title
Low lux mode (The indicator flashes.)
Sports lesson mode (The indicator flashes.)

Ec epeae POWER ycae


ee MEMORY
Ceye y e paa:
ppa ee pe
pa paca
y yc ce SteadyShot
SUPER NIGHTSHOT
eep
e pae
p e
Tp
Pe ceec (ap
ae.)
Pe cpx cca (ap
ae.)

When you are recording a still image


You can neither turn off the power nor press
PHOTO.

Note
When recording still images at step 2 with the
PHOTO button pressed lightly, the image
momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.

Ec aa y PHOTO a ye
ca ypae
Baa eaepa cpay e ae
paee, pe ye a pae
e aa .
peae
p ac ex pae
ye 2, a cea aaa a
PHOTO, paee papee
ae. Oa e ec
ecpac.
p ac pee a
pae cac e
e, e pee CAMERA.

Oepa c Memory Stick

When recording in memory mode


The angle of view is a little increased than one in
CAMERA mode.

Ec B acaee ee
paee
B e ee ae
aa y PHOTO.

Memory Stick operations

When you press PHOTO on the Remote


Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the image
that is on the screen when you press the button.

139

Recording still images on


Memory Sticks
Memory Photo recording
Recording images continuously
You can record still pictures continuously. Select
one of the two modes described below before
recording.
Continuous mode [a] (DCR-TRV20E only)
When the image size is set to 1152864, you can
record up to four pictures continuously.
When the image size is set to 640480, you can
record up to 16 pictures continuously. The
number of recorded photos in continuous mode
depends on the capacity of the Memory Stick.
Multi screen mode [b] (Recording image size is
640480)
You can record nine still pictures continuously
on a single page.

ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a
Hepepa ac
pae
B ee aca pae
epep. Bepe yx
pe, cax e, epe ac.
Hepep pe [a] (
e DCR-TRV20E)
a paep pae ycaaaec
a 1152864, aca e ee
epex pae epep.
a paep pae ycaaaec
a 640480, aca e ee 16
pae epep. ec
acaex c pee
epep ac ac ec
Memory Stick.
Mpa pe [b] (Paep
pae 640480)
M aca e ex
pae epep a cpae.

[a]

While pressing down PHOTO, your camcorder


continuously record maximum number of still
pictures depending on the image size.
When you stop pressing, the recording stops.

140

[b]

p aa e PHOTO, eaepa
epep acae acae
ec pae acc x
paepa.
Ec y yc, ac cac.

Recording still images on


Memory Sticks
Memory Photo recording

ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a

(1)Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make


sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left
(unlock) position.
(2)Press MENU to display the menu.
(3)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
, then press the dial.
(4)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
CONTINUOUS, then press the dial.
(5)Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
the desired setting, then press the dial.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae ee
ee (papa).
(2) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca
, a ae ae a
c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa CONTINUOUS, a ae ae a
c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa eae yca, a ae
ae a c.

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

3
4

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
ON
I MAGE S I ZE MULT I SCRN
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

If the capacity of the Memory Stick becomes


full

FULL appears on the LCD screen or in the


viewfinder, and you cannot record still pictures
on this Memory Stick.

Oepa c Memory Stick

MENU

CAMERA

Memory Stick operations

VCR

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS ON
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

Ec Memory Stick epeec


Ha pae caee c
ap
FULL, ye e
aca ee pae a
Memory Stick.

141

Recording still images on


Memory Sticks
Memory Photo recording

ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a

Continuous shooting settings

ca epep ce

Setting

Meaning (indicator on the


screen)

caa

aee (ap a
pae)

OFF

Your camcorder shoots one


image at a time. (no indicator)

OFF

Baa eaepa eae


c a pa (e
apa).

ON
(
e
DCR-TRV20E)

Beaepa cae e
ee 16 ex
pae c epaa
pep 0,5 ce. (
)

ON
Your camcorder shoots up to 16
(DCR-TRV20E still images at about 0.5 sec
only)
intervals. ( )
MULTI SCRN Your camcorder shoots nine still
images at about 0.5 sec intervals
and displays the images on a
single page divided into nine
boxes. Still images are recorded
in 640480 size. (
)
The number of images in continuous shooting
The number of images you can shoot
continuously varies depending on the image size
and the capacity of the Memory Stick.
Image size

The number of images

640480

Up to 16 images

1152864

Up to 4 images

Note on using the video flash light (not


supplied)
The video flash light does not work in the
continuous or multi screen mode if you install it
to the intelligent accessory shoe.

MULTI SCRN Beaepa cae e


ex pae c
epaa pep 0,5 ce
paae pae a
cpae, paee
a e py.
Paep acaex
ex pae
640480. (
)
ec pae p
epep cee
ec pae, pe
ca epep, eec
acc paepa pae
ec Memory Stick.
Paep
pae

ec
pae

640480

He ee 16 pae

1152864

He ee 4 pae

peae ca
ec (e paaec)
Beca e paae epep
pa pee, ec a
ycaea epae
caex ycpc.

142

Recording still images on


Memory Sticks
Memory Photo recording

ac ex
pae a Memory Stick
ac pa a

Self-timer memory photo


recording

cea aepy
caayca c cxpaee
a

You can make a memory photo recording with


the self-timer. This mode is useful when you
want to record yourself.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left
(unlock) position.
(2) Press SELFTIMER in the standby mode. The
(self-timer) indicator appears on the LCD
screen or in the viewfinder.
(3) Press PHOTO.
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with
a beep sound. In the last two seconds of the
countdown, the beep sound gets faster, then
recording starts automatically.

M cey c cxpaee
a aepy caayca. pe
ee cyae, ec B xe
ac cce pae.

PHOTO
PHOTO

To cancel self-timer recording


Press SELFTIMER so that the
(self-timer)
indicator disappears from on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder. You cannot cancel the selftimer recording using the Remote Commander.
Note
The self-timer recording mode is automatically
cancelled when:
Self-timer recording is finished.
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
To check the picture to be recorded
You can check the picture with pressing the
PHOTO button lightly, then press it deeper to
capture.

e ac aepy
caayca
Hae y SELFTIMER,
ap
(aep caayca) ce c
paa caee. ac
aepy caayca e e c
ya ca ypae.

Oepa c Memory Stick

SELFTIMER

Memory Stick operations

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae ee
ee (papa).
(2) Hae y SELFTIMER pee
a. ap
(aep
caayca) c a pae
caee.
(3) Hae y PHOTO.
Taep caayca ae pa
ce c 10 c yep ca. B
cee e cey pa cea
yep ca ye ya ae, a
ae aaec aec ac.

peae
Pe ac aepy caayca ye
aaec ee cyax:
Oa ac aepy caayca.
epeae POWER ycae
ee OFF (CHG) VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
pep acae
pae
M pep paee, cea
aa y PHOTO, ae ae ee
cee e ce.

143

Superimposing a still picture in a


Memory Stick on a moving
picture MEMORY MIX

Haee e
pae Memory Stick a
e paee MEMORY MIX

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

You can superimpose a still picture you have


recorded on a Memory Stick on the top of the
moving picture you are recording.

B ee a ee
paee, acae a Memory Stick,
epx acae
pae.

M. CHROM (Memory chromakey)


You can swap a blue area of a still picture such as
an illustration or a frame with a moving picture.
M. LUMI (Memory luminancekey)
You can swap a brighter area of a still picture
such as a handwritten illustration or title with a
moving picture. Record a title on a Memory
Stick before a trip or event for convenience.
C. CHROM (Camera chromakey)
You can superimpose a moving picture on the
top of a still picture such as a picture can be used
as background. Shoot the subject against a blue
background. The blue area of the moving picture
will be swapped with a still picture.
M. OVERLAP (Memory overlap)
You can make a moving image fade in on top of a
still image.

M. CHROM (a ec a)
M ae c ac
e pae, apep,
pcy ap paee.
M. LUMI (a pc a)
B ee e eca ee py
ac e pae, a a
pcy p e paee.
epe yeece a-y
ce ae p yca a
Memory Stick.
C. CHROM (a ec eaep)
e paee a
epx e pae,
apep, pcya, cye aece
a. Ce e a ce e. C
ac pae ye
aeea a ee paee.
M. OVERLAP (Haee c a)
M cea a, e
paee cee c epx
e pae.

144

Superimposing a still picture in a


Memory Stick on a moving
picture MEMORY MIX
Still picture/
Hee
paee

Moving picture/
e
paee

M. CHROM

Haee e
pae Memory Stick a
e paee MEMORY MIX

Blue/C
Still picture/
Hee
paee

Moving picture/
e
paee

M. LUMI

Moving picture/
e
paee

C. CHROM

b
Blue/C

M. OVERLAP

Before operation
Insert a mini DV tape for recording into your
camcorder.
Insert a recorded Memory Stick into your
camcorder.

b
epe aa pa
Bcae ey DV ac
eaepy.
Bcae acay Memory Stick
eaepy.

Oepa c Memory Stick

Moving picture/
e
paee

Still picture/
Hee
paee

Memory Stick operations

Still picture/
Hee
paee

145

Superimposing a still picture in a


Memory Stick on a moving
picture MEMORY MIX

Haee e
pae Memory Stick a
e paee MEMORY MIX

(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.


(2) Press MEMORY MIX in the standby mode.
The last recorded or last composed image
appears on the lower part of the screen as a
thumbnail image.
(3) Press MEMORY+/ to select the still picture
you want to superimpose.
To see the previous image, press MEMORY .
To see the next image, press MEMORY+.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select the
desired mode.
The mode changes as follows:
M.CHROM t M.LUMI t C.CHROM t
M.OVERLAP
(5) Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial.
The still picture is superimposed on the
moving picture. Your camcorder
automatically returns to the standby mode.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the
effect.
When M.OVERLAP is selected, no adjustment
is necessary.
(7) Press START/STOP to start recording.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee CAMERA.
(2) Hae y MEMORY MIX pee
a.
ceee acae cae
paee c e ac
paa e e pae.
(3) Hae y MEMORY+/ pa
e pae, pe B
xe a a e.
pcpa peye pae
ae y MEMORY .
pcpa ceye pae
ae y MEMORY +.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC pa
y pea.
Pe ye ec cey
pa:
M.CHROM t M.LUMI t C.CHROM t
M.OVERLAP
(5) Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.
Hee paee ye ae
a e. Baa eaepa
aaec epec pe a.
(6) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
peyp ea.
a pa pe M.OVERLAP, acpe
e peyec.
(7) Hae y START/STOP aaa
ac.

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAMERA

3
4

M. LUMI

M. LUMI I I I

M. LUMI I

2 MEMORY MIX
M. CHROM

146

Still picture/
Hee
paee

Superimposing a still picture in a


Memory Stick on a moving
picture MEMORY MIX

Haee e
pae Memory Stick a
e paee MEMORY MIX

Items to adjust

y peyp

M. CHROM

M. LUMI

The colour (blue) scheme of the


area in the still picture which is
to be swapped with a moving
picture
The colour (bright) scheme of the
area in the still picture which is
to be swapped with a moving
picture

The colour (blue) scheme of the


area in the moving picture which
is to be swapped with a still
picture
M. OVERLAP No adjustment necessary

M. CHROM

ea aa (c)
ac e
pae, py y
ae
paee

M. LUMI

ea aa (cea)
ac e
pae, py y
ae
paee

C. CHROM

ea aa (c)
ac
pae, py y
ae e
paee

C. CHROM

The fewer bars there are on the screen, the


stronger the effect.

Do either of the following:


Press MEMORY+/ before step 6.
Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial befor step 6,
and repeat the procedure form step 4.

To change the mode setting


Press the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial before step 6,
and repeat the procedure from step 4.

Press MEMORY MIX again.

e ee c a pae, e cee
e.

ee e
pae, pe peyec
a
Be ceyx ec.
Hae y MEMORY+/ epe
y 6.
Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC epe
y 6 pe peypy c ya
4.

ee yca pea
Hae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC epe
y 6 pe peypy c ya 4.

e M. CHROM/M. LUMI/
C. CHROM/M. OVERLAP
Hae y MEMORY MIX ee pa.

Oepa c Memory Stick

To cancel M. CHROM/M. LUMI/C.


CHROM/M. OVERLAP

M. OVERLAP Peyp e peyec


Memory Stick operations

To change the still picture to be


superimposed

147

Superimposing a still picture in a


Memory Stick on a moving
picture MEMORY MIX

Haee e
pae Memory Stick a
e paee MEMORY MIX

During recording
You cannot change the mode setting.

B pe ac
B e ee e ycay pea.

The Memory Stick supplied with your


camcorder has stored 20 images
For M.CHROM : 18 images (such as a frame)
100-0001 ~ 100-0018
For C.CHROM : 2 images (such as a
background) 100-0019 ~ 100-0020

Memory Stick, paaea


eaepe, eae 20 pae
M.CHROM : 18 pae (ax a
ap) 100-0001 ~ 100-0018
C.CHROM : 2 pae (ax a
) 100-0019 ~ 100-0020

Sample images
Sample images stored in the Memory Stick
supplied with your camcorder are protected
(p. 164).

Opa pae
Opa pae, cxpaee a
Memory Stick, paae eaepe,
ae (cp. 164).

If a still picture to be superimposed has lots of


white areas
The thumbnail image may not be displayed
clearly.

Ec e pae,
pe peyec a, cyecye
ace e ea
M-paee e paac e
cce e.

Image data modified with personal computers


or shot with other equipment
You may not be able to play them back with your
camcorder.
Note
When the overlapping still picture has a large
amount of white, the thumbnail image of the
picture may not be clear.

148

ae pae, eee c
epca epa
ce c py aapayp
B e cee cpec x c
Bae eaep.
peae
Ec a aaae e
pae ec e ee
ac, ee paee e
e cce e.

Recording an image
from a mini DV tape
as a still image

ac pae c
e DV a
e pae

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

Your camcorder can read moving picture data


recorded on a mini DV tape and record it as a
still image on a Memory Stick.

Baa eaepa e ca ae
yec pae, acae a
ee DV, aca x a
ee pae a Memory
Stick.

Before operation
Insert a recorded mini DV tape into your
camcorder.
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

PLAY

FF

OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

CAPTURE

PHOTO

CAMERA

Oepa c Memory Stick

REW

VCR

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV11E).
(2) Hae N. Haec cpeee
pae, aca a ee
DV.
(3) epe cea aa y PHOTO
ex p, a paee c e
DV e ye ape. Ha
pae caee c
a CAPTURE. ac a e
aec.
(4) Hae y PHOTO cee.
paee, paaee a pae,
ye aca a Memory Stick. ac
ye aepea, a cee
ap e c.

Memory Stick operations

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)


/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the mini
DV tape is played back.
(3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the
picture from the mini DV tape freezes.
CAPTURE appears on the LCD screen or in
the viewfinder. Recording does not start yet.
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed
on the screen will be recorded on a Memory
Stick. Recording is complete when the bar
scroll indicator disappears.

epe aa pa
Bcae acay ey DV
eaepy.
Bcae Memory Stick Bay
eaepy.

4
PHOTO

149

Recording an image from a mini


DV tape as a still image

ac pae c e
DV a e pae

Image size of still pictures


Image size is automatically set to 640 480.

Paep ex pae
Paep pae aaec
ycaaaec pa 640 480.

When the access lamp is lit or flashing


Never shake or strike the unit. As well do not
turn the power off , eject a Memory Stick or
remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image
data breakdown may occur.
If appears on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder
The inserted Memory Stick is incompatible
with your camcorder because its format does not
conform with your camcorder. Check the format
of the Memory Stick.
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback
mode
Your camcorder stops momentarily.
Sound recorded on a mini DV tape
You cannot record the audio from a mini DV
tape.
Titles have already recorded on mini DV tapes
You cannot record the titles on Memory Sticks.
The title does not appear while you are recording
a still picture with PHOTO.
When you press PHOTO on the Remote
Commander
Your camcorder immediately records the image
that is on the screen when you press the button.

Ec aa pae p
ae
Ha e pce eaepy e
cye e. Tae e ae
ae, e eae Memory Stick
cea e cae aape . B
p cyae ae pae y
pee.
Ec a pae caee
c a
caea Memory Stick, pa e
ceca c eaep, cy ee
pa e cecye pay
eaep. pepe pa Memory
Stick.
Ec pee cpee cea
aa y PHOTO
Beaepa cpay e cac.
y, aca a ey DV
B e ee aca y c e
DV.
Tp, ye acae a e DV
Tp e aca a Memory Stick.
Tp e c pe ac
e pae c
PHOTO.
Ec aa y PHOTO a ye
ca ypae
Baa eaepa cpay e ae
paee, pe ye a pae
e aa .

150

Recording an image from a mini


DV tape as a still image
Recording a still image from
other equipment

ac pae c e
DV a e pae
ac e pae
c py pya

DCR-TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV20E

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR and set


to LCD in the menu settings.
DISPLAY in
Set A/V t DV OUT in
to OFF in the
menu settings.
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV
on to see the desired programme.
The image of the other equipment is
displayed on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
(3) Follow the steps 3 and 4 on page 149.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VTR ay DISPLAY e
ee LCD ycaax e.
cae ay A/V t DV OUT
ee
OFF ycaax e.
(2) Hae cpeee aca e
e eep pcpa
eae ppa.
paee c py pya
paaec a pae
caee.
(3) Be y 3 4 a cp. 149.

When recording the image through the


AUDIO/VIDEO jack

p ac pae epe e
AUDIO/VIDEO

S VIDEO

A/V connecting cable/


cee ae ay/
e.

S VIDEO

VIDEO

AUDIO/VIDEO
: Signal flow/epeaa caa

When recording the image through the


IN/OUT jack

DV

S VIDEO

DV

cee e eep cee


ae ay/e ey ecaa a
eae eepe.

p ac pae epe e
IN/OUT

DV

LANC

Oepa c Memory Stick

Connect the yellow plug of the A/V connecting


cable to the video jack on the VCR or the TV.

Memory Stick operations

OUT

i.LINK cable (DVconnecting cable)/


ae i.LINK (cee ae DV)

: Signal flow/epeaa caa


Connect using an S video cable (not supplied)
to obtain high-quality pictures
With this connection, you do not need to connect
the yellow (video) plug of the A/V connecting
cable.
Connect an S video cable (not supplied) to the S
video jacks of both your camcorder and the VCR.
This connection produces higher quality DV
format pictures.

Be ceee c
ae S e (e paaec)
ye caecex
pae
p a cee Ba e y
a e (e) eep
cee ae ay/e.
cee ae S e (e paaec)
ea S e a eaepe
eae.
p a cee B cee y
caecee pae paa DV.

151

Copying still images


from a mini DV tape
Photo save

pae ex
pae c e DV
Cxpaee a c

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

Using the search function, you can automatically


take in only still images from mini DV tapes and
record them on a Memory Stick in sequence.

C y ca
aaec ea c c e DV
ceae aca x a Memory
Stick.

Before operation
Insert a recorded mini DV tape into your
camcorder and rewind the tape.
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

epe aa pa
Bcae acay ey DV
eaepy epeae ee aa.
Bcae Memory Stick Bay
eaepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)


/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
PHOTO SAVE, then press the dial. PHOTO
BUTTON appears on the LCD screen or in
the viewfinder.
(5) Press PHOTO deeper. The still image from the
mini DV tape is recorded on a Memory
Stick. The number of still images copied is
displayed. END is displayed when copying
is completed.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV11E).
(2) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca
, a ae ae a
c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca PHOTO SAVE, a ae
ae a c. Ha pae
caee c a
PHOTO BUTTON.
(5) Hae y PHOTO cee.
Hee paee a ee
DV aec a Memory Stick. ye
pae ec ex
cpax pae.
aepe pa ye
paea a END.

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

MENU

PHOTO SAVE

0 : 00 : 00 : 00

PHOTO

[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
PHOTO SAVE

152

MEMORY SET
QUAL I TY
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
PHOTO SAVE READY
RETURN

PHOTO SAVE

[MENU] : END

[PHOTO] : START

8 / 15

END
4
[MENU] : END

[MENU] : END

0 : 30 : 00 : 00

4 / 15

SAV I NG
0

PHOTO SAVE

0 : 00 : 00 : 00
4 / 15

PHOTO BUTTON
[MENU] : END

CAMERA

Copying still images from a mini


DV tape Photo save

pae ex pae c e
DV Cxpaee a c

To stop or end copying

ca pepae
pa

Press MENU.

Hae y MENU.

When the memory of the Memory


Stick is full
MEMORY FULL appears on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder, and the copying stops. Insert
another Memory Stick and repeat the
procedure from step 2.
Image size of still pictures
Image size is automatically set to 640 480.
When the access lamp is lit or flashing
Never shake or strike your camcorder. As well
do not turn the power off, eject a Memory Stick
or remove the battery pack. Otherwise, the image
data breakdown may occur.

B cyae epee Memory


Stick
Ha pae caee c
a MEMORY FULL, pae
pepac. Bcae pyy Memory Stick
pe peypy c ya 2.
Paep ex pae
Paep pae aaec
ycaaaec pa 640 480.

ac cex pae, acax


a ee DV
epeae ey a aa ae
pae.

When you change Memory Sticks in the


middle of copying
Your comcorder resumes copying from the last
image recorded on the previous Memory Stick.

Ec eec a ac a
Memory Stick ycae ee
LOCK
p pe eea ycaax e
c a NOT READY.
Ec ae Memory Stick cepee
pa
Beaepa p pae c
cee pae, aca a
peye Memory Stick.

Oepa c Memory Stick

If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick


is set to LOCK
NOT READY appears when you select the item
in the menu settings.

Memory Stick operations

To record all the images recorded on the mini


DV tape
Rewind the tape all the way back and start
copying.

Ec aa pae p
ae
Ha e pce eaepy e
cye e. pe , e ae
ae, e eae Memory Stick
cea e cae aape . B
p cyae ae pae y
pee.

153

Viewing a still picture


Memory photo
playback

pcp e
pae Bcpeee
c a

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

You can play back still images recorded on a


Memory Stick. You can also play back six
images at a time by selecting the index screen.

M cp ee
pae, acae a Memory Stick.
M ae cp pee
ec pae ye pa ec
paa.

Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the
left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded
image is displayed.
(3) Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired still
image. To see the previous image, press
MEMORY . To see the next image, press
MEMORY +.

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee MEMORY VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae ee ee
(papa).
(2) Hae y MEMORY PLAY.
c ceee acae
paee.
(3) Hae y MEMORY +/ pa
y e pae.
pcpa peye pae
ae y MEMORY .
pcpa ceye pae
ae y MEMORY +.

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

PLAY

To stop memory photo playback


Press MEMORY PLAY again.

CAMERA

ca cpee
c a
Hae y MEMORY PLAY ee pa.

154

Viewing a still picture


Memory photo playback

pcp e pae
Bcpeee c a

To play back recorded images on a TV screen


Connect your camcorder to the TV with the
A/V connecting cable supplied with your
camcorder before the operation.
When operating memory photo playback on a
TV or on the LCD screen, the image quality
may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a
malfunction. The image data is as good as ever.
Turn the audio volume of the TV down before
operation, or noise (howling) may be output
from the TV speakers.
The message
NO FILE appears when no
image is recorded on the Memory Stick.

cpee acax
pae a pae eepa

Recording date
When you press DATA CODE, you can see the
date of the recording.

acae ae
p aa DATA CODE
pcpe pa ac.
ae pae, eee c
epca epa
ce c py aapayp
B e cee cpec x c
Bae eaep.

pae ap pe
cpee ex
pae
[a]
[b]/[c]

100-0006

640

6 / 100
MEMORY PLAY

[d]

Oepa c Memory Stick

Screen indicators during still


image playback

Memory Stick operations

Image data modified with personal computers


or shot with other equipment
You may not be able to play them back with your
camcorder.

epe aa cpee
cee eaepy eepy c
cee ae ay/
e, p paaec eaepe.
p cpee c
a a pae eepa
aec pae e yxyc.
Oa e ec ecpac.
ae pae axc e
cc, a pee.
epe aa cpee
yee pc ya a eepe,
ae aycec ccee e
ce y.
NO FILE ec, a
Cee
paee e aca a Memory Stick.

[e]

[f]
[a] Image size
[b] Image number
[c] Total number of recorded images
[d] Print mark
[e] Protect indicator
[f] Data Directory Number, File Number

[a] Paep pae


[b] Hep pae
[c] Oee ec acax
pae
[d] ea a
[e] ap a
[f] Hep aaa ax, ep aa

155

Viewing a still picture


Memory photo playback

pcp e pae
Bcpeee c a

Playing back six recorded


images at a time (index screen)
You can play back six recorded images at a time.
This function is especially useful when searching
for a particular image.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the
left (unlock) position.
(2) Press MEMORY INDEX.

Opeee cpeee
ec acax pae
(ec pa)
M cp ec acax
pae pee. a y
ec ce y p e
ca ex pae.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee MEMORY VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae ee ee
(papa).
(2) Hae y MEMORY INDEX.

VCR

INDEX

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

Ha paee c paca ea
B, pa paaec epe
epeee pe ec paa.

MEMORY : to display the previous six images


MEMORY +: to display the following six images

MEMORY : pae ec
peyx pae
MEMORY +: pae ec
ceyx pae

100-0006

156

CAMERA

A red B mark appears above the image that is


displayed before changing to the index screen
mode.

B mark/
B

6 / 100

To return to the normal playback


screen (single screen)

paa pay
cpee ( pa)

Press MEMORY +/ to move the B mark to the


image you want to display on full screen, then
press MEMORY PLAY.

Hae y MEMORY +/
epeee e B pae,
pe ex pa ec
pa, ae ae y MEMORY PLAY.

Viewing a still picture


Memory photo playback

pcp e pae
Bcpeee c a

Note
When displaying the index screen, the number
appears above each image. This indicates the
order in which images are recorded on the
Memory Stick. These numbers are different
from the data file names.

peae
p pae ec paa a
a paee ye c
ep. O aae p, p
pae aca a Memory Stick.
epa ac e a
ax.

Files modified with personal computers


These files may not be displayed on the index
screen. Image files shot with other equipment
may not be displayed on the index screen either.
To make the display disappear
Press DISPLAY.

ae pae, eee c
epca epa
a y e pae a
ec pae. a pae,
cx c py aapayp, y
e paac a ecx
pa.
, cea a
Hae y DISPLAY.

ae pae, acae c
Bae eaep, cac paa
JPEG. C cae c
eaep pa ppa
ecee, PictureGear 4.1Lite
pcapa pae, acae a
Memory Stick, a pae epa.
ex ca ae
ceae epeca ,
paae a eaepe.
pae, acae a Memory Stick,
cp a pae
epa pee a.

DIGITAL I/O/
(LANC)

Oepa c Memory Stick

The image data recorded with your camcorder is


compressed in the JPEG format. If you use the
application software, PictureGear 4.1Lite
supplied with your camcorder, you can see
images recorded on the Memory Stick on a
computer screen. Use the PC serial cable
supplied with your camcorder for this operation.
You can playback the images on the "Memory
Stick"s on the computer screen only in the
memory mode.

pcp acax
pae a epca
epe

Memory Stick operations

Viewing the recorded images


using a personal computer

Serial Port/
ceae
p

PC serial cable/ae ceae epeca


: Signal flow/

157

Copying the image


recorded on Memory
Sticks to mini DV tapes

pae pae,
acax Memory
Stick, a e DV

DCR-TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV20E

You can copy still images or titles recorded on


Memory Stick and record them to a mini DV
tape.

M pa ee
pae p, acae a
Memory Stick, aca x a ey
DV.

Before operation
Insert mini DV tape for recording into your
camcorder.
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

epe aa pa
Bcae ey DV ac
eaepy.
Bcae Memory Stick Bay
eaepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.


(2) Using the video control buttons, search a
point where you want to record the desired
still image. Set the mini DV tape to playback
pause mode.
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right
simultaneously on your camcorder. The mini
DV tape is set to the recording pause mode.
(4) Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the still
image you want to copy.
(5) Press X to start recording and press X again
to stop.
(6) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 4 and 5.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee VCR.
(2) C ep
ae ec, ya ex aa
ac y e
pae. cae ey DV
pe ay cpee.
(3) Opee ae y z REC
y cpaa ee a eaepe.
ea DV ycaea pe
ay ac.
(4) Hae y MEMORY PLAY
cpee e
pae, pe ex
cpa.
(5) Hae y X, aa ac.
ca ac ca ae
y X.
(6) Ec ex ae cpa
pye pae, pe y 4
5.

BX

zX

REC

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POWER

MEMORY

PLAY

To stop copying in the middle


Press x.

158

CAMERA

PAUSE

ca pa, e
ac a
Hae x.

Copying the image recorded on


Memory Sticks to mini DV
tapes

pae pae,
acax Memory Stick, a
e DV

During copying
You cannot operate the following buttons:
MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX, MEMORY
DELETE, MEMORY +, MEMORY , and
MEMORY MIX.

B pe pa
He ca ceye :
MEMORY PLAY, MEMORY INDEX, MEMORY
DELETE, MEMORY +, MEMORY MEMORY
MIX.

Note on the index screen


You cannot record the index screen.

peae ecy pay


ec pa e aca.

If you press EDITSEARCH during pause mode


Memory playback stops.

Ec aa y EDITSEARCH pe
ay
Bcpeee a cac.

Image data modified with personal computers


or shot with other equipment
You may not be able to copy them with your
camcorder.

Ec aa y DISPLAY pee
a ac
pe ap, cxc ea
DV, apep, ap a pee,
ye ap cpee
a e aa.

Memory Stick operations

If you press DISPLAY in the standby or


recording mode
You can see memory playback and the file name
indicators in addtion to the indicators pertinent
to mini DV tape, such as the time code indicator.

ae pae, eee c
epca epa
ce c py aapayp
B, x e ye cpa c
eaep.

Oepa c Memory Stick

159

Enlarging still images


recorded on Memory
Sticks Memory PB ZOOM

eee ex
pae, acax a
Memory Stick a PB ZOOM

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

You can enlarge still images recorded on a


Memory Stick.

B ee ye ee
pae, acae a Memory Stick.

Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.

(1) In the memory playback mode, press PB


ZOOM on your camcorder.
The still image is enlarged, and R r T t
appears on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder.
(2) Turn SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the
enlarged image, then press the dial.
R : The image moves downwards
r : The image moves upwards
(3) Turn SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to move the
enlarged image, then press the dial.
t : The image moves leftward (Turn the
dial to upwards.)
T : The image moves rightward (Turn the
dial to downwards.)

(1) B pee cpee a


ae y PB ZOOM a
eaepe.
Hee paee ye
yee, a a pae
caee c R r T t.
(2) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
R : paee epeeaec
r : paee epeeaec epx
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
epeee yee pae,
ae ae a c.
t : paee epeeaec e
(epe c epx.)
T : paee epeeaec pa
(epe c .)

PB ZOOM

PB ZOOM
[EXEC] :

PB ZOOM

[EXEC] :

160

To cancel the play zoom function

e y paca

Press PB ZOOM again.

Hae y PB ZOOM ee pa.

Enlarging still images recorded


on Memory Sticks Memory PB
ZOOM

eee ex
pae, acax a
Memory Stick a PB ZOOM

Note
You cannot record the images enlarged by the PB
ZOOM mode on Memory Sticks.

peae
pae, yeee c
pea paca PB ZOOM, e
aca a Memory Stick.

The PB ZOOM function is cancelled when the


following buttons are pressed:
MENU
MEMORY PLAY
MEMORY INDEX
MEMORY +/
In the PB ZOOM mode
The digital effect function does not work.

B pee PB ZOOM
y p ea e paae.
pae pee PB ZOOM
pae pee PB ZOOM e
epeac epe e xa/xa DV
IN/OUT (DCR-TRV20E) e xa
DV OUT (DCR-TRV11E).

Memory Stick operations

Pictures in the PB ZOOM mode


Pictures in the PB ZOOM mode are not output
through the DV IN/OUT jack (DCR-TRV20E)
or DV OUT jack (DCR-TRV11E).

y PB ZOOM eec p
aa ceyx :
MENU
MEMORY PLAY
MEMORY INDEX
MEMORY +/

Oepa c Memory Stick

161

Playing back images


in a continuous loop
SLIDE SHOW

Bcpeee pae
epep ceaec
ayy y ecpa ca

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

You can automatically play back images in


sequence. This function is useful especially when
checking recorded images or during a
presentation.

B ee aaec cp
pae epep
ceaec. a y ce
ya p pepe acax
pae pe peea.

Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left
(unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
SLIDE SHOW, then press the dial.
(5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays
back the images recorded on a Memory
Stick in sequence.

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae ee
ee (papa).
(2) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca
, a ae ae a
c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca SLIDE SHOW, a ae
ae a c.
(5) Hae y MEMORY PLAY. Baa
eaepa cpee pae,
acae a Memory Stick,
epep ceaec.

VCR

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

MENU

CAMERA

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
[MENU] : END

162

PLAY

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW READY
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

SL I DE SHOW
100-0001

640

1 / 100

[M PLAY] : START [MENU] : END

Playing back images in a


continuous loop SLIDE SHOW
To stop or end the slide show
Press MENU.

Bcpeee pae
epep ceaec
ayy y ecpa ca
ca pepae
ecpa ca
Hae y MENU.

To pause during a slide show


Press MEMORY PLAY.

ay pe ecpa
ca

To start the slide show from a


particular image

Hae y MEMORY PLAY.

Select the desired image using MEMORY +/


buttons before step 2.

aaa aa ca c
peee pae

To view the recorded images on TV


Connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/V
connecting cable supplied with your camcorder
before operation.

pcpa acax pae


a pae eepa
epe aa peyp cee
eaepy eepy c
cee ae ay/e,
paae eaepe.
Ec ae Memory Stick pe
pa
y aa ca e ye paa.
p aee Memory Stick e ce
ec c aaa.

Memory Stick operations

If you change the Memory Stick during


operation
The slide show does not operate. If you change
the Memory Stick, be sure to follow the steps
again from the beginning.

epe y 2 epe peyee


paee c MEMORY +/.

Memory Stick

163

Preventing
accidental erasure
Image protection

pepaee
cya cpa
aa pae

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

To prevent accidental erasure of important


images, you can protect selected images.

pepae cya cpa


ax pae B ee a
pae pae.

Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR


(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the
left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image you want to protect.
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
PROTECT, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON,
then press the dial.
(7) Press MENU to make the menu display
disappear. The - mark is displayed beside
the data file name of the protected image.

3,7

MENU

4
5
6

164

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee MEMORY VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae ee ee
(papa).
(2) Bcpee paee, pe B
xe a.
(3) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca
, a ae ae a
c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca PROTECT, a ae
ae a c.
(6) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca ON, a ae ae a
c.
(7) Hae y MENU, ypa
e. P c aae aa
ae pae c
c -.

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
10 / 12
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
OFF
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
10 / 12
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
ON
SL I DE SHOW OFF
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
10 / 12
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
ON
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

Preventing accidental erasure


Image protection

pepaee cya
cpa aa pae

To cancel image protection

e a pae

Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH


EXEC dial.

Bepe ycay OFF ye 6, a ae


ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.

Note
Formatting erases all information on the
Memory Stick, including the protected image
data. Check the contents of the Memory Stick
before formatting.

peae
B pe papa yac ce
ae a Memory Stick, a ae
aex pae. epe
papae pepe cepe
Memory Stick.

If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick


is set to LOCK
You cannot carry out image protection.

Ec eec a ac a
Memory Stick ycae ee
LOCK
B e cee ay
pae.

Memory Stick operations


Memory Stick

165

Deleting images

aee
pae

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

Deleting selected images


Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the
left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image you want to delete
(p. 154).
(3) Press MEMORY DELETE with a sharppointed object. DELETE? appears on the
LCD screen or in the viewfinder.
(4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected
image is deleted.

PLAY

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.
(1) cae epeae POWER
ee MEMORY VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae ee ee
(papa).
(2) Bcpee paee, pe B
xe ya (cp. 154).
(3) Hae y MEMORY DELETE c
acpe peea.
ap DELETE? c a pae
caee.
(4) Hae y MEMORY DELETE ee
pa. Bpae paee ye
yae.

VCR

aee pax pae

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

CAMERA

3,4

DELETE
100-0010

DELETE

640

DELETE?
[DELETE] : DEL

[ ] : CANCEL

To cancel deleting an image

e yae pae

Press MEMORY in step 4.

Hae y MEMORY ye 4.

To delete an image displayed on the


index screen
Press MEMORY +/ to move the B indicator to
the desired image and follow steps 3 and 4.
Notes
To delete a protected image, first cancel image
protection.
Once you delete an image, you cannot restore
it. Check the images to delete carefully before
deleting them.
You cannot delete images if the write-protect
tab on a Memory Stick is set to LOCK.

166

89 / 100

yae pae,
paae a ec pae
Hae y MEMORY +/
epeee apa B yy
pae e ec
y 3 4.
pea
yae ae pae,
caaa ee ay pae.
ce yae pae B e
cee cca e. Bae
pepe pae, pee e
ya x.
aee pae e
, ec eec a
ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.

Deleting images

aee pae

Deleting all the images

aee cex pae


B ee ya ce eaee
pae a Memory Stick.

Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make


sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left
(unlock) position.
(2) Press MENU to display the menu.
(3) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
DELETE ALL, then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select OK,
then press the dial. OK changes to
EXECUTE.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
EXECUTE, then press the dial. DELETING
appears on the LCD screen or in the
viewfinder. When all the unprotected images
are deleted, COMPLETE is displayed.

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee MEMORY. eec,
epeae LOCK ycae ee
ee (papa).
(2) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(3) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca
, a ae ae a
c.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca DELETE ALL, a ae
ae a c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca OK, a ae ae a
c. a OK ec a
a EXECUTE.
(6) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca EXECUTE, a ae
ae a c. ap DELETING
c a pae
caee. a ce eaee
pae yy yae, a cee
c a COMPLETE.

OFF(CHG)

POW

ER

MEMORY

CAMERA

4
5
2

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MENU

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL READY
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL RETURN
OK
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL RETURN
OK
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL RETURN
EXECUTE
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL DELET I NG
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

Memory Stick

VCR

Memory Stick operations

You can delete all the unprotected images in a


Memory Stick.

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL COMPLETE
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

167

168

Deleting images

aee pae

To cancel deleting all the images in


the Memory Stick

e yae cex
pae a Memory Stick

Select
RETURN in step 5, then press the SEL/
PUSH EXEC dial.

Bepe
RETURN ye 5, ae
ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.

While DELETING appears


Do not turn the POWER switch or press any
buttons.

B pe pae a
DELETING
He ee ee epeae
POWER e aae ax .

Writing a print mark


PRINT MARK

ac eax
a PRINT MARK

DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only

T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E

You can specify the recorded still image to print


out. This function is useful for printing out still
images later.
Your camcorder conforms with the DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format) standard for
specifying the still images to print out.

B ee yaa acae pae


pacea. a y ec
e pacea ex
pae e.
Baa eaepa yepe
pea caapa DPOF (p
pa pa ea) a
ex pae a paceay.

Before operation
Insert a Memory Stick into your camcorder.

MENU

(1) cae epeae POWER


ee MEMORY VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
eec, epeae LOCK
ycae ee ee
(papa).
(2) Bcpee paee, pe
ex paceaa.
(3) Hae y MENU pae
e.
(4) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca
, a ae ae a
c.
(5) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca PRINT MARK, a ae
ae a c.
(6) epe c SEL/PUSH EXEC
pa yca ON, a ae ae a
c.
(7) Hae y MENU, ypa
e. P c aae aa
pae c ea a c
c
.

4
5
6

MEMORY SET
CONT I NUOUS OFF
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
10 / 12
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK OFF
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

Memory Stick

3,7

epe aa pa
Bcae Memory Stick Bay eaepy.

Memory Stick operations

(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR


(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV11E).
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the
left (unlock) position.
(2) Play back the image to be printed out.
(3) Press MENU to display the menu.
(4) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
,
then press the dial.
(5) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select
PRINT MARK, then press the dial.
(6) Turn the SEL/PUSH EXEC dial to select ON,
then press the dial.
(7) Press MENU to make the menu display
mark is displayed
disappear. The
beside the data file name of the image with a
print mark.

MEMORY SET
10 / 12
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK ON
PROTECT
OFF
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

MEMORY SET
10 / 12
CONT I NUOUS
QUAL I TY
I MAGE S I ZE
PR I NT MARK ON
PROTECT
SL I DE SHOW
DELETE ALL
FORMAT
RETURN
[MENU] : END

169

170

Writing a print mark


PRINT MARK

ac eax a
PRINT MARK

To cancel writing print marks

e ac eax a

Select OFF in step 6, then press the SEL/PUSH


EXEC dial.

Bepe ycay OFF ye 6, a ae


ae a c SEL/PUSH EXEC.

If the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick


is set to LOCK
You cannot write print marks on still images.

Ec eec a ac a
Memory Stick ycae ee
LOCK
B e cee aca eae a a
ex paex.

Additional Information

ea pa

Usable cassettes

cyee acce

Selecting cassette types

Bp a acce

You can use the


mini DV cassette only*. You
Hi8,
cannot use any other 8 mm,
Digital8,
VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHS,
S-VHSC, Betamax or
DV cassette.

M ca acce
DV*. He ca e pye
acce a 8 ,
Hi8, Digital8,
VHS,
VHSC,
S-VHS,
S-VHSC, Betamax a
DV.

* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with


cassette memory and without cassette memory.
Tapes with cassette memory have
(Cassette
Memory) mark.
We recommend you to use the tape with
cassette memory.

* Cyecye a a acce DV: c


acce a e acce a.
Ha eax c acce a eec
(accea a).
ea
Peeyec ca e c
acce a.

This is the Mini DV mark.

ea pa

mark on the cassette


The memory capacity of tapes marked with
is 4KB. Your camcorder can accommodate
tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16KB.
16KB tape is marked with
.

Ha a e acce DV ycaea
a e epa cxe. Baa
eaepa e ca aca
ae, ae a a ac, p ..
y a.
y, cyx accey
a, peyec ac a ey
ceaex ca. Ec a ee
eec eaca yac aae
ey aca ac, p e
epa paac y
ca y paa eppe. e
ca eacax yac a ee,
e ceyee.
Hae y END SEARCH epexa
e aca yaca epe e, a
B aee ceyy ac, ec:
B e accey pe ac.
B cpe accey pee VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E).
B ca y a
ca.
Ec a Bae ee eec eaca
yac pepac ca,
e epeac c aaa a c
ye ecaa.
Ta e peya e yc p
e ac c p
eaep e y acce a
a ey, acay c cae
y acce a.

Additional Information

The IC memory is mounted on this type of mini


DV cassette. Your camcorder can read and write
data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to
this memory.
The functions using the cassette memory require
successive signals recorded on the tape. If the
tape has a blank portion in the beginning or
between the recorded portions, a title may not be
displayed properly or the search functions may
not work properly. Not to make any blank
portion on the tape, operate the followings.
Press END SEARCH to go to the end of the
recorded portion before you begin the next
recording if you operate the followings:
you have ejected the cassette while recording.
you have played back the tape in the VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E).
you have used the edit search function.
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal
on your tape, re-record from the beginning to the
end of the tape concerning above.
The same result may occur when you record
using a digital video camera recorder without a
cassette memory function on a tape recorded by
one with the cassette memory function.

Mea a accee
Ec a e c e
paa 4
. Baa eaepa e paa c
accea c ec a 16. 16
ea aaec c e
.

This is the Cassette Memory mark.


ea DV.
These are trademarks.

ea acce a.
Tpe ap.

171

Usable cassettes
When you play back
Copyright signal
When you play back
Using any other video camera recorder, you
cannot record on tape that has recorded a
copyright control signals for copyright protection
of software which is played back on your
camcorder.
When you record (DCR-TRV20E only)
You cannot record software on your
camcorder that contains copyright control
signals for copyright protection of software.
COPY INHIBIT appears on the LCD screen, in
the viewfinder or on the TV screen if you try to
record such software.
Your camcorder does not record copyright
control signals on the tape when it records.

Audio mode
12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded
in stereo 1, and the new sound in stereo 2 in 32
kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2
can be adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the
menu settings during playback. Both sounds can
be played back.
16-bit mode: A new sound cannot be recorded
but the original sound can be recorded in high
quality. Moreover, it can also play back sound
recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When
playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode,
16BIT indicator appears on the LCD screen or in
the viewfinder.

When you play back a dual


sound track tape
When you play back a dual sound track tape
recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi SOUND
to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 116).
Sound from speaker
HiFi Sound
Mode
STEREO
1
2

172

Playing back
Playing back
a dual sound
a stereo tape
track tape
Stereo
Main sound and
sub sound
Left sound
Main sound
Right sound
Sub sound

You cannot record dual sound programmes on


your camcorder.

cyee acce
p cpee
Ca apc paa
p cpee
cy y pyy eaepy, B e
cee ac a ey, a
p aca ca apc paa
a apcx pa ppa,
cpx a Bae eaepe.
B pe ac ( e DCRTRV20E)
Ha eaepe e
ac ppa, pa cep
ca apc paa a
apcx pa.
p ac a ppa a
pae , caee a pae
eepa c a COPY
INHIBIT.
B pe ac a eaepa e
acae ca apc paa a ey.

Aype
12- pe: epaa y
e aca a cepeec
aa 1, a y - a cepeec
aa 2 pee 32 . aac ey
cepeec aa 1
cepeec aa 2
peypa ye pa yca
AUDIO MIX ycaax MENU pe
cpee. M cp a
ya.
16- pe: He aca
y, a aca
epaa y c aeca.
pe , y cp
peax 32 , 44,1 48 . p
cpee e, aca 16 pee, a pae
caee c ap 16BIT.

p cpee e c
y p
p cpee e c
y p, aca
cepeec ccee, ycae
y pe HiFi SOUND ycaax
e (cp. 116)
y aa
Pe
Bcpeee Bcpeee
HiFi
cepeec e c
Sound
e
y p
Oc
STEREO Cepe
cae
y
y e
Oc y
1
aaa
y pa
Bcae
2
aaa
y
Ha Bae eaepe e
aca ppa c y
p.

Usable cassettes

cyee acce

Notes on the mini DV cassette

pea accee DV

When affixing a label on the mini DV


cassette

p ppee e a
accey DV

Be sure to affix a label only on the locations as


illustrated below [a] so as not to cause
malfunction of your camcorder.

Oae ppee e
ecax, aax a pcyax e [a],
e pe pee
aep.

After using the mini DV cassette


Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the
cassette in its case, and store it in an upright
position.

When the cassette memory function


does not work

ce ca acce
DV
epeae ey aay, e
accey yp xpae ee
epa e.

Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of


mini DV cassettes may be dirty or dusty.

Ec e paae y acce
a

Cleaning gold-plated connector

Bcae accey ee pa. e


pae acce DV e
ape ae.

Oca e paea
Ec e pae acce DV
ape ae, B e cee
ypa ye c acce
a. ppae e pae c
xaya aa
pep ce 10 pa ca
acce. [b]

[a]

[b]

ea pa

Do not affix a label around this border./


He ppee ey
pa.

Additional Information

If the gold-plated connector of mini DV cassettes


is dirty or dusty, you may not operate the
function using cassette memory. Clean up the
gold-plated connector with cotton-wool swab,
about every 10 times ejection of a cassette. [b]

173

About i.LINK

O aee i.LINK

The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant


DV input/output jack. This section describes the
i.LINK standard and its features.

e DV a a aapae ec
i.LINK-cec x/x
e DV. B a paee caec
caap i.LINK e cec.

What is i.LINK?
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling
digital video, digital audio and other data in two
directions between equipment having the i.LINK
jack, and for controlling other equipment.
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected
by a single i.LINK cable. Possible applications are
operations and data transactions with various
digital AV equipment. When two or more
i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to
this unit in a daisy chain, operations and data
transactions are possible with not only the
equipment that this unit is connected to but also
with other devices via the directly connected
equipment.
Note, however, that the method of operation
sometimes varies according to the characteristics
and specifications of the equipment to be
connected, and that operations and data
transactions are sometimes not possible on some
connected equipment.
Note
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be
connected to this unit by the i.LINK cable (DV
cable). When connecting this unit to i.LINKcompatible equipment having two or more
i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the instruction
manual of the equipment to be connected.

About the Name i.LINK


i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data
transport bus proposed by SONY, and is a
trademark approved by many corporations.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard
standardized by the Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers.

ae i.LINK?
i.LINK - p ceae
epec epea p e-
aycaa, a ae pyx ax ey
pyae, e e i.LINK,
yx apaex, a ae ypae
py pyae.
i.LINK-cece pyae
ac c ae
i.LINK. Me cac
ypae epea ax c pa
p ay-e pyae.
a ec i.LINKcecx ycpc e
ay aapay ceae
cxee pca, ypaee epeaa ax
e ycpca,
py e a aapa,
ae pyx ycpc epe
pyae, ee apy.
Ceye a e y, e
ypae a eec cec
c xapaepca cea
e pya. pe ,
ypaee epeaa ax a
a e a epx
ex ycpcax.
peae
a pa, ay aapay c
ae i.LINK (ae DV)
ycpc. p e
a aapaa i.LINK-cecy
ycpcy, eey a ee e
i.LINK (e DV), paec cpy
cyaa ae
pya.

O aa i.LINK

174

i.LINK ec ee a ep
epea ax caapa IEEE
1394, pee ppae SONY.
i.LINK ec p ap, pa
ppa.
IEEE 1394 - eyap caap,
p cy eep
epexe paepe.

About i.LINK
i.LINK Baud rate
i.LINKs maximum baud rate varies according to
the equipment. Three maximum baud rates are
defined:
S100 (approx. 100Mbps*)
S200 (approx. 200Mbps)
S400 (approx. 400Mbps)
The baud rate is listed under Specifications in
the instruction manual of each equipment. It is
also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some
equipment.
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which
it is not indicated such as this unit is S100.
When units are connected to equipment having a
different maximum baud rate, the baud rate
sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.

i.LINK functions on this unit

Required i.LINK Cable


Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during
DV dubbing).
i.LINK and are trademarks.

Macaa cpc epea ax


ae i.LINK eec acc
pya. Opeee p
acae cpc epea ax:
S100 (p. 100 M/c*)
S200 (p. 200 M/c)
S400 (p. 400 M/c)
Cpc epea ax yaaec
paee apaepc cpy
cyaa a ycpca. Ha
epx ycpcax a yaaec
p c e i.LINK.
Macaa cpc epea ax
ycpca, a p a e yaaa,
apep, a aapaa, paa
S100.
p e a aapaa
ycpcy, eey pyy acay
cpc epea ax, a cpc
a aec yaa.
* ae M/c (Mbps)?
M/c cecye cy ea
ceyy ey ax, pe
pa epeaa a y ceyy.
Hapep, cpc epea ax paa
100 M/c aae, y ceyy
epea 100 ea ax.

y i.LINK a a
aapae
ee py pa epeac,
a aapa e pyy
epya, eey ea DV,
c. a cp. 82, 99.
pe epya, a aapa
ae a pyy i.LINK
(DV) cecy pya p
SONY (apep, epcay
epy cep VAIO).
epe ee aapaa
epcay epy, pepe,
ycae a epe ppae
eceee, paaee ay
aapay.
ee py pa epax
pecpc p e a
aapaa ae a cpyx
cyaa ae
pya.

ea pa

For details on how to dub when this unit is


connected to other video equipment having DV
jacks, see page 82, 99.
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK
(DV) compatible equipment made by SONY (e.g.
VAIO series personal computer) other than video
equipment.
Before connecting this unit to a personal
computer, make sure that application software
supported by this unit is already installed on the
personal computer.
For details on precautions when connecting this
unit, also refer to the instruction manuals for the
equipment to be connected.

Cpc epea ax
ae i.LINK

Additional Information

*What is Mbps?
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the
amount of data that can be sent or received in
one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps
means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in
one second.

Tpeye ae i.LINK
cye ae Sony i.LINK 4-a-4pa ( pe epeac p
e).
i.LINK pe ap .

175

English

Troubleshooting
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to troubleshoot the
problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility. If C:ss:ss appears on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder, the
self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 182.

In the recording mode


Symptom
START/STOP does not operate.

The power goes off.

The image on the viewfinder screen


is not clear.
The SteadyShot function does not
work.
The autofocusing function does not
work.

The fader function does not work.


The picture does not appear in the
viewfinder.
A vertical band appears when you
shoot a subject such as lights or a
candle flame against a dark
background.
A vertical band appears when you
shoot a very bright subject.

Your camcorder is not a malfunction.

Some tiny white spots appear on the


LCD screen or in the viewfinder .

Slow shutter, low lux or Super NightShot mode is activated.


This is not a malfunction.
If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to
CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu settings
without a cassette inserted, your camcorder automatically
starts the demonstration.
c Insert a cassette and the demonstration stops.
You can also cancel DEMO MODE. (p. 121)

An unknown picture is displayed on


the LCD screen or in the viewfinder.

176

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.
c Set it to CAMERA. (p. 21)
The tape has run out.
c Rewind the tape or insert a new one. (p. 20, 39)
The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.
c Use a new tape or slide the tab. (p. 20)
The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
one hour to acclimatize. (p. 195)
While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder has
been in the standby mode for more than five minutes.
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to CAMERA
again. (p. 22)
The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.
c Adjust the viewfinder lens. (p. 25)
STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON. (p. 116)
FOCUS is set to MAN.
c Set it to AUTO. (p. 65)
Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.
c Adjust to focus manually. (p. 65)
The digital effect function is working.
c Cancel it. (p. 60)
The LCD panel is open.
c Close the LCD panel. (p. 23)
The contrast between the subject and background is too high.
Your camcorder is not a malfunction.

Troubleshooting
Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.
c Set it to OFF. (p. 31)
Picture appears too bright, and the
NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place.
subject does not appear on the LCD
c Set it to OFF, or use the NightShot function in a dark place.
screen or in the viewfinder.
(p. 31)
The click of the shutter does not
BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.
sound.
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL. (p. 116)
Black bands appear when you record
c Set the STEADYSHOT in the menu settings to OFF. (p. 116)
The picture is recorded in incorrect or
unnatural colours.

TV or computer screen.

In the playback mode


Symptom
The tape does not move when a
video control button is pressed.

The playback picture is not clear or


does not appear.
There are horizontal lines on the
picture or the playback picture is
not clear or does not appear.

Displaying the recorded date, date


search function does not work.

The title search function does not


work.

The new sound added to the


recorded tape is not heard.
The title is not displayed.

(continued on the following page)

ea pa

No sound or only a low sound is


heard when playing back a tape.

Additional Information

The playback button does not


work.

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


The POWER switch is not set to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
c Set it to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E). (p. 36)
The tape has run out.
c Rewind the tape. (p. 39)
The televisions video channel is not adjusted correctly.
c Adjust it. (p. 41)
The video head may be dirty.
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (not supplied).
(p. 196)
The volume is turned to minimum.
c Turn up the volume. (p. 36)
AUDIO MIX is set to ST2 in the menu settings.
c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 116)
The tape has no cassette memory.
c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 75, 171)
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON. (p. 116)
The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 76)
The tape has no cassette memory.
c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 73, 171)
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON. (p. 116)
There is no title in the tape.
c Superimpose the titles. (p. 108)
The tape has a blank portion in the recorded portion. (p. 74)
AUDIO MIX is set to ST1 side in the menu settings.
c Adjust AUDIO MIX. (p. 116)
TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON. (p. 116)

177

Troubleshooting
In the recording and playback modes
Symptom
The power does not turn on.

The end search function does not


work.
The end search function does not
work correctly.
The battery pack is quickly
discharged.

The battery remaining indicator does


not indicate the correct time.

The power goes off although the


battery remaining indicator indicates
that the battery pack has enough
power to operate.
The cassette cannot be removed from
the holder.

The % and Z indicators flash and no


functions except for cassette ejection
work.
indicator does not appear when
using a tape with cassette memory.
Remaining tape indicator is not
displayed.

178

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.
c Install a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
The AC power adaptor is not connected to the mains.
c Connect the AC power adaptor to the mains. (p. 19)
The tape was ejected after recording when using a tape without
cassette memory. (p. 34, 40)
You have not recorded on the new cassette yet. (p. 34, 40)
The tape has a blank portion in the beginning or middle.
The operating temperature is too low.
The battery pack is not fully charged.
c Charge the battery pack again. (p. 14)
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13)
You have used the battey pack in an extremely hot or cold
environment for a long time.
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be recharged.
c Replace with a new battery pack. (p. 13)
The battery is dead.
c Use a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on
the battery remaining indicator is correct.

The power source is disconnected.


c Connect it firmly. (p. 13, 19)
The battery is dead.
c Use a charged battery pack. (p. 13, 14)
Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
one hour to acclimatize. (p. 195)
The gold-plated connector of the tape is dirty or dusty.
c Clean the gold-plated connector. (p. 173)
The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape indicator.
(p. 116)

Troubleshooting
When operating using the Memory Stick
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only
Symptom
The Memory Stick does not
function.
Recording does not function.

The image cannot be deleted.

Deleting all the images cannot be


carried out.
You cannot protect the image.

The photo save function does not


work.

(continued on the following page)

ea pa

You cannot write a print mark on


the still image.

Additional Information

You cannot format the Memory


Stick.

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY.
c Set it to MEMORY. (p. 138)
The Memory Stick has already been recorded to its full
capacity.
c Erase unnecessary images and record again. (p. 166)
The Memory Stick is not inserted.
c Insert a Memory Stick. (p. 133)
The Memory Stick formatted incorrectly is inserted.
c Format the Memory Stick or use another Memory Stick.
(p. 119)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 131)
The image is protected.
c Cancel image protection. (p. 164)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 131)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 131)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 131)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 131)
The image to protect is not be played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 154)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 131)
The image to write a print mark is not be played back.
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image. (p. 154)
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK.
c Set the tab to write. (p. 131)
The battery pack is dead.
c Install a charged battery pack or use the AC power adaptor

179

Troubleshooting
Others
Symptom

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


The tape has no cassette memory.
c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 108, 171)
The cassette memory is full.
c Erase another title. (p. 111)
The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible.
(p. 20)
Nothing is recorded in that position on the tape.
c Superimpose the title to the recorded position. (p. 108)
The tape has no cassette memory.
The cassette label is not recorded.
c Use a tape with cassette memory. (p. 114, 171)
The cassette memory is full.
c Erase some titles. (p. 115)
The tape is set to prevent accidental erasure.
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not visible.
(p. 20)
Remove the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), and connect it
While editing using the i.LINK cable
again.
(DV connecting cable), recording

The title is not recorded.

picture cannot be monitored.


Digital program editing does not
function.

The Remote Commander supplied


with your camcorder does not work.

The picture from a TV or VCR does


not appear even when your
camcorder is connected to output on
the TV or VCR (DCR-TRV20E only.)
You cannot charge the battery pack.

180

The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.


c Check the connection and set the input selector on the VCR
again. (p. 84)
The camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other than Sony.
c Set it to IR. (p. 85)
Setting programme on a blank portion of the tape is attempted.
c Set the PROGRAM again on a recorded portion. (p. 93)
The camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.
c Adjust the synchronicity. (p. 90)
COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.
c Set it to ON. (p. 116)
Something is blocking the infrared rays.
c Remove the obstacle.
The batteries are inserted in the battery holder with the +
polarities incorrectly matching the + marks.
c Insert the batteries with the correct polarity. (p. 213)
The batteries are dead.
c Insert new ones. (p. 213)
Display is set to V-OUT/LCD in the menu settings.
c Set it to LCD. (p. 116)

The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).


c Set it to OFF (CHG).

Troubleshooting
Symptom
The melody or beep sounds for 5
seconds.

While charging the battery pack, no


indicator appears or the indicator
flashes in the display window.

No function works though the


power is on.

Additional Information

When you set the POWER switch to


VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E) or OFF
(CHG), if you move your camcorder,
you may hear a clatter sound from
inside your camcorder.

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least 1
hour to acclimatize. (p. 195)
Some troubles has occurred in your camcorder.
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
camcorder.
The AC power adaptor is disconnected.
c Connect it firmly. (p. 19)
The battery pack is not properly installed.
c Install it properly.
Something is wrong with the battery pack.
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
facility.
Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or remove
the battery, then reconnect it in about one minute. Turn the
power on. If the functions still do not work, open the LCD
panel and press the RESET button beside the SELFTIMER
button using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET
button, all the settings including the date and time return to the
default.) (p. 207)
Your camcorder is not a malfunction.

ea pa

181

English

Self-diagnosis display
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display
function.
This function displays the current condition of
your camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of
a letter and figures) in the viewfinder, on the LCD
screen or in the display window. If a 5-digit code is
displayed, check the following code chart. The last
two digits (indicated by ss) will differ depending
on the state of your camcorder.

LCD screen (or Viewfinder)


C:21:00

Self-diagnosis display

C:ss:ss
You can service your camcorder
yourself.
E:ss:ss
Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony facility.

Five-digit display
C:04:ss

C:21:ss

C:22:ss

C:31:ss
C:32:ss

E:61:ss
E:62:ss

Cause and/or Corrective Actions


You are using a battery pack that is not an InfoLITHIUM
battery pack.
c Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack. (p. 14)
Moisture condensation has occurred.
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least
one hour to acclimatize. (p. 195)
The video heads are dirty.
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (not supplied).
(p. 196)
A malfunction other than the above that you can service has
occurred.
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate your
camcorder.
c Disconnect the mains lead of the AC power adaptor or
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power
source, operate your camcorder.
A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
facility and inform them of the 5-digit code.
(example: E:61:10)

If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times, contact your
Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

182

English

Warning indicators and messages


If indicators and messages appear in the viewfinder, on the LCD screen or in the display window,
check the following:
See the page in parentheses ( ) for more information.
The indicators and messages are displayed in yellow.

Warning indicators
The video heads are dirty
Slow flashing:
You need to clean the heads using the Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (not supplied) (p. 196).
The battery is dead or nearly
dead
Slow flashing:
The battery is nearly dead.
The battery is dead (p. 14).
Depending on conditions, the E
indicator may flash, even if there
are five to 10 minutes remaining.

Warning indicator as to cassette memory


Slow flashing:
No tape with cassette memory is inserted
(p. 171).*

Self-diagnosis display (p. 182).


C:21:00

100-0001

You need to eject the cassette


Slow flashing:
The write-protect tab on the cassette is out
(red) (p. 20).*
Fast flashing:
Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 195).*
The tape has run out (p. 20, 36).*
The self-diagnosis display function is
activated (p. 182).*
The still image is protected
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)
Slow flashing:
The still image is protected
(p. 164).*

Warning indicator as to Memory


Stick (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)
Slow flashing:
No Memory Stick is inserted
(p. 133).*
Fast flashing:
The Memory Stick is not
readable with your camcorder
(p. 131).*
Warning indicator as to Memory
Stick (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)
Fast flashing:
Memory Stick is not formatted
correctly (p. 119).
The Memory Stick data is
corrupted.*
Different size of Memory Stick is
inserted.

ea pa

Fast flashing:
The tape has run out (p. 20, 39).*

Additional Information

Warning indicator as to tape


Slow flashing:
The tape is near the end.
No tape is inserted (p. 20).*
The write-protect tab on the
cassette is out (red) (p. 20).*

Moisture condensation has occurred*


Fast flashing:
Eject the cassette, turn off your
camcorder, and leave it for about 1 hour
with the cassette compartment open
(p. 195).

Warning indicator as to file


Slow flashing:
The file is corrupted.
The file is unreadable.

* You hear the melody or beep sound.

183

Warning indicators and messages


Warning messages
CLOCK SET
Reset the date and time (p. 129).
FOR InfoLITHIUM Use an InfoLITHIUM battery pack (p. 14).
BATTERY ONLY

CLEANING CASSETTE
The video heads are dirty (p. 196).
FULL

The tape cassette memory is full.

16BIT

AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 116).* You cannot dub new sound.

REC MODE

REC MODE is set to LP (p. 116).* You cannot dub new sound.

TAPE

There is no recorded portion on the tape. You cannot dub new sound.

i.LINK CABLE i.LINK cable is connected (p. 107).* You cannot dub new sound.

AV CABLE

A/V connecting cable is connected (p. 41).* You cannot dub new sound.
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E only)

FULL

The Memory Stick is full.* (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)

The write-protect tab on the Memory Stick is set to LOCK (p. 131).*
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)

NO FILE

No still image is recorded on the Memory Stick (p. 155).*


(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)

NO MEMORY STICK
No Memory Stick is inserted (p. 133). (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)

MEMORY STICK ERROR


The Memory Stick data is corrupted. (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)

FORMAT ERROR The Memory Stick is not recognized (p. 132). Check the format. (DCRTRV11E/TRV20E only)

DIRECTORY ERROR
There is more than two same directories.

COPY INHIBIT

The tape contains copyright control signals for copyright protection of


software (p. 172).* (DCR-TRV20E only)

TAPE END

The tape has reached the end of the tape (p.40).*

NO TAPE

Insert a cassette tape (p. 20).*

* You hear the melody or beep sound.

184

Pycc

c ycpaee ecpace
Ec y Bac a aa- pea p ca eaep, cyec
ceye ae ca ycpae pe. Ec pea e ycpaec,
ceye ce c a pac cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe cya e Sony. Ec a pae
caee ac a :ss:ss, a, cpaaa y ce
caac. C. cp. 191.

B pee ac
Ba pa

Bepa pa / e ycpae
epeae POWER e ycae ee
CAMERA.
c cae e ee CAMERA. (cp. 21)
aac ea.
c epeae ey aa cae y accey.
(cp. 20, 39)
eec a ac ycae a, a
paca ea.
c cye y accey epee eec.
(cp. 20)
ea pa apaay (eca a).
c ee accey cae eaepy
pe a ac aaa.
(cp. 195)
p pae pee CAMERA Baa eaepa
paae ae.
axac pee a ee y.
c cae caaa epeae POWER ee
OFF (CHG) ae ca ee CAMERA. (cp. 22)
He peypa e cae.
paee a pae
c Opeypye e cae. (cp. 25)
cae eee.
aa STEADYSHOT ycaea ee OFF
He paae y yc
ycaax e.
ce.
c cae ee ee ON. (cp. 116)
aa FOCUS ycaea ee MAN.
He paae y
c cae ee ee AUTO. (cp. 65)
aaec ycp.
c ce e x aaec
ycp.
c Opeypye yc pyy. (cp. 65)
peea ece y p ea.
He paae y eepa.
c Oee ee. (cp. 60)
Opa ae .
B caee e ec
c ape ae . (cp. 23)
paee.
C ca pacc ey e
p cee e a a
. B eaepe e ecpac.
ae ce a e e
He paae a START/STOP.

Additional Information
ea pa

ec epaa ca.
ec epaa epa
ca p cee e px
e.
B caee a pae
c aee
ee .
Ha pae
caee paaec
ee paee.

B eaepe e ecpac.
Be pe ee apa,
ceec yye ce. Oa
e ec ecpac.
Cyc 10 y ce yca epeae POWER
ee CAMERA a DEMO MODE
ee ON ycaax e, a accea e
caea, eaepa aaec aae
ecpa.
c Bcae accey, ecpa cac.
B ae ee e pe DEMO MODE. (cp. 127)
(pee a ceye cpae)

185


Ba pa
paee acaec c
epa
eecece ea.
paee yaec c
p, e e paaec
a pae
caee.
He ce e apa.

p ac c paa eepa
ce epa
c epe c.

Bepa pa / e ycpae
aa NIGHTSHOT ycaea ee ON.
c cae ee ee OFF. (cp. 31)
aa NIGHTSHOT ycaea ee ON
p ece.
c cae ee ee OFF cye
y ce e ece. (cp. 31)
aa BEEP ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
c cae ee ee MELODY NORMAL.
(cp. 116)
c cae ay STEADYSHOT ee OFF
ycaax e. (cp. 116)

B pee cpee
Ba pa
p aa ypae
eaep ea e
epeeaec.
a cpee e
paae:
Bcpe paee
eee e e
ec.
Ha pae pcycy
pae c,
cpe paee
eee e paaec a
pae.

B, ape e.
c ce c ce acce
(e paaec). (cp. 196)

p cpee e e
ya e ce x
y.

cae ae aee pc.


c ee pc. (cp. 36)
aa AUDIO MIX ycaea ee ST2
ycaax e.
c Opeypye ay AUDIO MIX. (cp. 116)
ea e ee acce a.
c cye ey c acce a. (cp. 75, 171)
aa CM SEARCH ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
c cae ee ee ON. (cp. 116)
Ha ee eec eaca yac ey
aca ac. (cp. 76)
ea e ee acce a.
c cye ey c acce a. (cp. 73, 171)
aa CM SEARCH ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
c cae ee ee ON. (cp. 116)
Ha ee e p.
c Hae p. (cp. 108)
Ha ee eec eaca yac ey
aca ac. (cp. 74)

He paae y
pae aca a,
ca a.

He paae y ca
p.

186

Bepa pa / e ycpae
epeae POWER e ycae ee VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).
c cae e ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/
PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E). (cp. 36)
aac ea.
c epeae ey aa. (cp. 39)
Beaa eepa peypa epa.
c Opeypye e aea pa. (cp. 41)


Ba pa
He ce y,
ae a acay
ey.
He paaec p.

Bepa pa / e ycpae
aa AUDIO MIX ycaea a ee ST1
ycaax e.
c Opeypye ay AUDIO MIX. (cp. 116)
aa TITLE DSPL ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
c cae ee ee ON. (cp. 116)

B peax ac cpee
Ba pa
He aec ae.

Hepa paae y
ca a.
aape cp
papaec.

ae aec, x
ap caec pee
pa aape aae,
e cac ca ap
ee ypa.
accea e aec
epae.

Ma ap % Z,
ae y, pe
ee acce, e paa.

ea pa

ap caec pee
pa aape paae
epae pe.

Opyaa eepaypa ec c .
aape ape e c.
c ape ca aape . (cp. 14)
aape c pape e e
epeape.
c aee e a aape . (cp. 13)
aape ee pe cac p
e c eepaype pyae
cpe.
aape c pape e e
epeape.
c aee e a aape . (Cp. 13)
aape c pape.
c cye ape aape . (Cp. 13, 14)
c Ca c ape aape ,
ap pa aa caeec pe
pa aape.

Additional Information

He paae y ca
a a ee.

Bepa pa / e ycpae
He ycae aape , cce
papc.
c cae ape aape . (cp. 13, 14)
Cee aaep epee a e cee
ce.
c cee cee aaep epee a
ce. (cp. 19)
accea a ya ce ac p ca
e e acce a. (cp. 34, 40)
ac a y accey ee e ac. (cp. 34, 40)
Ha ee ec pyc aae cepee.

Ocee c a.
c cee e . (cp. 13, 19)
aape c pape.
c cye ape aape . (cp. 13, 14)
pa eca a.
c ee accey cae eaepy
pe a ac, a e capc aa.
(cp. 195)
(pee a ceye cpae)

187


Ba pa
He paaec ap
p ca e c
acce a.
He paaec ap
caec e.

Bepa pa / e ycpae
ape ae e pae acce.
c ppe e pae. (cp. 173)
ap q REMAIN ycae ee AUTO
ycaax e.
c cae e ee ON, cea
paac ap caec e. (cp. 116)

p ca Memory Stick
T e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
Ba pa
He paae Memory Stick.

He ec ac.

He yaec paee.

He papa
Memory Stick.
He yaec yaee
cex pae.
B e ee a
paee.

188

Bepa pa / e ycpae
epeae POWER e ycae ee
MEMORY.
c cae e ee MEMORY. (cp. 138)
Memory Stick c aea.
c Cpe eye pae ae ca.
(cp. 166)
He caea Memory Stick.
c Bcae Memory Stick. (cp. 133)
Bcaea Memory Stick epa papaa.
c Opapye Memory Stick cye pyy
Memory Stick. (cp. 125)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 131)
paee ae.
c Oee ay pae. (cp. 164)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 131)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 131)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 131)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 131)
paee, pe y a, e
cpc.
c Hae y MEMORY PLAY cpee
pae. (cp. 154)


Ba pa

Bepa pa / e ycpae
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 131)
paee, a pe ex aca ea
a, e cpc.
c Hae y MEMORY PLAY cpee
pae. (cp. 154)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
He paae y cxpae
ee LOCK.
a c.
c cae eec ee ac. (cp. 131)
aape c pape.
c cae ape aape
cye aaep epee a.
B e ee aca ea
a a e
pae.

pee
Ba pa
He acac p.

He paae y p
aa ppa.

Ceep x caa a eae


ycae epa.
c pepe ceee ca ycae ceep
x caa ee VCR. (cp. 84)
Beaepa ceea aapaype DV e p
Sony.
c cae e ee IR. (cp. 85)
a yca ppa a eacay ac
e.
c cae PROGRAM ee pa a acay ac
e. (cp. 93)
Beaepa ea e cxppa.
c Opeypye cxpc. (cp. 90)
(pee a ceye cpae)

ea pa

B pe aa c
cae ae i.LINK
(cee ae DV),
acaee paee e
ppyec.

Additional Information

He ec appa
acce.

Bepa pa / e ycpae
ea e ee acce a.
c cye ey c acce a. (cp. 108, 171)
accea a epeea.
c Cpe py p. (cp. 111)
Ha accee ea ycaa pepae
cya cpa.
c epee eec a ac a, e
e pac yac. (cp. 20)
H e aca a yace e.
c Hae p a aca yac. (cp. 108)
ea e ee acce a.
c cye ey c acce a. (cp. 114, 171)
accea a epeea.
c Cpe epe p. (cp. 115)
Ha accee ea ycaa pepae
cya cpa.
c epee eec a ac a, e
e pac yac. (cp. 20)
Ocee ae i.LINK (cee ae DV)
cee ca.

189

Ba pa
He paae paae
Bae eaepe y
ca ypae.

He ec paee c
eepa
eaa, ae ec
eaepa ceea
xa eepa
eaa (
e DCR-TRV20E.)
aape e
ap.
B eee 5 cey y
e yep ca.

B pe ap aape
a ap e
ec e ae e
ce.

p e a e
paae a y.

Ec epeae POWER
ycae ee VCR
(DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER (DCRTRV6E/TRV11E) OFF (CHG),
p epeee
eaep e cac
pec.

190

Bepa pa / e ycpae
aa COMMANDER ycaea ee OFF
ycaax e.
c cae ee ee ON. (cp. 116)
- pecye pxe papacx ye.
c cpae pece.
aape cae epae a, ca +
pace e cec c ca + .
c Bcae aape, ca aeay
pc. (cp. 213)
aape papc.
c Bcae e aape. (cp. 213)
aa ce ycaea ee V-OUT/LCD
ycaax e.
c cae ee ee LCD. (cp. 116)

epeae POWER e ycae ee OFF


(CHG).
c cae eo ee OFF (CHG).
pa eca a.
c Be accey cae Bay eaepy pep
a 1 ac aaa. (cp. 195)
B Bae eaepe p ea.
c Be accey cae ee ca, a ae e
Bay eaepy.
Ocee cee aaep epee a.
c cee e . (cp. 19)
aape ycae epa.
c cae e pa.
Hecpac aape a.
c Opaec cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe cya e
Sony.
Ocee p aaepa epee a
ee aape , ae cyc pe
y yy cee ca. Be ae. Ec
y ce ee e paa, pe ae
ae y RESET p c SELFTIMER c
cp peea. (Ec B aa y
RESET, ce yca, a ay pe, epyc
epaa.) (cp. 207)
B eaepe e ecpac.

Pycc

a caac
B Bae eaepe eec y
caac.
a y paae eyee cce
Bae eaep e 5-a a
(a y p)
caee, a pae e
ce. B cyae pae 5-a
a ceye pepy
cec c ceye ae .
cee e p (aee a ss)
yy ac acc cc
Bae eaep.

aa a

:21:ss

:22:ss

E:61:ss
E:62:ss

a caac

:ss:ss
B ee
cyae Bae eaep
cace.
:ss:ss
Opaec cepc ep Sony
ece yee
pepe cya
e Sony.

Bepa pa / e ycpae
B cyee aape , p e ec
aape InfoLITHIUM.
c cye aape InfoLITHIUM (cp. 14)
pa eca a.
c ee accey cae eaepy
pe a ac, a e capc aa.
(cp. 195)
ape e.
c ce c ce acce
(e paaec). (cp. 196)
pa eaa, aac peex
e, py B ee ycpa cace.
c Be accey cae ee ca, a ae e
Bay eaepy.
c Ocee p epa cee aaepa
epee a ce aape . ce
p cee ca a e
Bay eaepy.
pa eaa, py B e cee ycpa
cace.
c Opaec cepc ep Sony ece
yee pepe cya e
Sony, e ceye c 5-a e.
(apep: E:61:10)

ea pa

:31:ss
:32:ss

C:21:00

Additional Information

:04:ss

pa ( cae)

Ec B e ee cace ycpa eay ae ce ecx


ca cecyx e ycpae, paec cepc ep Sony
ece yee pepe cya e Sony.

191

Pycc

peypeae ap ce
Ec caee, a pae e ce c ap
ce, pepe ceyee:
ee py pa c. a cpae pyx cax ( ).
.

peypeae ap
apc e
Meee ae:
Ba y c c ce acce Sony DVM-12CLD (e
paaec). (cp. 196)
aape papc
pa eca a*
papc.
cpe ae:
Meee ae:
ee accey, e Bay
aape
eaepy cae ee pep
pape.
a 1 ac c p ce
aape c
acce (cp. 195).
pape (cp. 14).
B acc yc,
peypeae ap
ap E e a,
acce c a
ae ec ee cac
Meee ae:
apa a 10 y.
He ycaea accea c acce
peypea ap
a (cp. 171).*
ce e
Meee ae:
a caac
ea ca a.
(cp. 191).
C:21:00
accea e caea (cp. 20).*
eec a ac a
peypeae ap
accee cycye (pac)
Memory Stick (
(cp. 20).*
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
cpe ae:
ea aac (cp. 20, 39).*
Ba y y accey
Meee ae:
eec a ac a accee
cycye (pac) (cp. 20).*
cpe ae:
pa eca a (cp. 195).*
ea aac (cp. 20, 36).*
Cpaaa y caac
(cp. 191).*
paee ae (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
Meee ae:
paee ae (cp. 164).*

* B yce e yep
ca.

192

100-0001

Meee ae:
He caea Memory Stick
(cp. 133).*
cpe ae:
Memory Stick e aec
eaep (cp. 131).*
peypeae ap
Memory Stick (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
cpe ae:
Memory Stick papaa
epa (cp. 125).
ae a Memory Stick
pee.*
Bcaea Memory Stick
py ea.

peypea ap
ce aa
Meee ae:
a pee.
a e aec.

peypeae ap ce
peypeae ce
CLOCK SET
epeycae ay pe (cp. 129).
FOR InfoLITHIUM cye aape InfoLITHIUM (cp. 14).
BATTERY ONLY

CLEANING CASSETTE
apc e (cp. 196).

FULL

16 BIT

AUDIO MODE ycae pe 16BIT (cp. 116).* H y


e epeaca

REC MODE

REC MODE ycae pe LP (cp. 116).* H y


e epeaca.

TAPE

Ha ee e yaca c ac. B e ee epeaca


y.

i.LINK CABLE

e ae i.LINK (cp. 107).* H y e


epeaca.

AV CABLE

e cee ae ay/e (cp. 41).* H


y e epeaca. ( e DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E)

FULL

Memory Stick epeea.*


( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
eec a ac a Memory Stick ycae
ee LOCK (cp. 131).*
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)

NO FILE

NO MEMORY STICK
He caea Memory Stick (cp. 133).
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)

MEMORY STICK ERROR

Ha Memory Stick e acax ex pae (cp.


155).*
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)

ae a Memory Stick pee


( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
FORMAT ERROR

apa Memory Stick e aa. pepe pa (cp. 132).


( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)

ea pa

Additional Information

accea a epeea.

DIRECTORY ERROR
Cyecye ee yx ax aa.

COPY INHIBIT

Ha ee cepac ypae ca apcx pa


a apcx pa a ppae eceee (cp. 172).*
( e DCR-TRV20E)

TAPE END

cy e e (cp. 40).*

NO TAPE

Bcae accey (cp. 20).*

* B yce e yep ca.

193

Using your camcorder


abroad
Using your camcorder abroad
You can use your camcorder in any country or
area with the AC power adaptor supplied with
your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC,
50/60 Hz.
Your camcorder is a PAL system based
camcorder. If you want to view the playback
picture on a TV, it must be a PAL system based
TV with AUDIO/VIDEO input jack.
The following shows TV colour systems used
overseas.
PAL system
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great
Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait,
Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal,
Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, Thailand, etc.
PAL-M system
Brazil
PAL-N system
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central
America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica,
Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the
Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.
SECAM system
Bulgaria, France, Guyana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq,
Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.

Simple setting of clock by time


difference
You can easily set the clock to the local time by
setting a time difference. Select WORLD TIME in
the menu settings. See page 122 for more
information.

cae Bae
eaep a pae
cae Bae
eaep a pae
B ee ca Bay eaepy
cpae ac aap
ceey aaepy epee a,
paaey Bae eaepe,
p ca aae
100 240 B epee a c ac
50/60 .
Baa eaepa paae ccee PAL.
Ec ex pcpe
cpe paee a pae
eepa, e eep,
paa ccee PAL c x
ea AUDIO/VIDEO.
He pee cce e
eee, cyee a pye.
Ccea PAL
Acpa, Acp, e, a, eca
Pecya, a, , epa,
Bepa, a, ,
a, ye, Maa, Ha ea,
Hpe, pya, Cayp, Caca
Pecya, ca, e, eap,
Taa ..
Ccea PAL-M
pa
Ccea PAL-N
Apea, apaa, pya
Ccea NTSC
aace cpa, , aaa,
epaa Aepa, , y,
ap, aa, , pe, Meca,
epy, Cypa, Taa, , CA,
Beecya ..
Ccea SECAM
ap, pa, aaa, Bep, pa,
pa, Ma, a, Pcc, paa ..

pca ycaa pa
pee a acax

194

B ee e yca ac a ece
pe ye yca pa pee.
Bepe ay WORLD TIME
ycaax e. pe cee
pee a cp. 128.

Maintenance
information and
precautions
Moisture condensation
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold
place to a warm place, moisture may condense
inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape,
or on the lens. In this condition, the tape may
stick to the head drum and be damaged or your
camcorder may not operate correctly. If there is
moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds
and the % indicator flashes. When the Z
indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is
inserted in your camcorder. If moisture
condenses on the lens, the indicator will not
appear.

If moisture condensation occurred

How to prevent moisture condensation


When you bring your camcorder from a cold
place into a warm place, put your camcorder in a
plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag
when the air temperature inside the plastic bag
has reached the surrounding temperature (after
about one hour).

Ec eaepa pecea x
eca ee eee, yp
eaep, a epxc e a
ee e p eca
a. B a cc ea e
py apaay ye
peea, e eaepa e ce
paa aea pa. Ec yp
eaep pa eca a,
py yep ca, a a pae
ye a ap %. Ec e
cae pe ye a ap Z,
a, eaepy caea
accea. Ec aa cecpaac a
ee, ap c e ye.

Ec pa eca a
H a y, pe ee
acce, e ye paa. ee
accey, e eaepy cae
ee pep a ac c p ce
acce. Beaepy ca
ca, ec ap % e
ec p p e
a.
peae eca a
Baa e paac, ec epeec
eaepy x eca ee
( ap) p ca
eaep ap ece ceyx
cyax:
B pec eaepy c ca
eee, e paae peae
B pec eaepy a
a c y
pae ape ec a
ye
B cyee eaepy ce p

B cyee eaepy e
ap a ece
a pepa eca a
Ec eaepa pecea x
eca ee, e eaepy
e ae aee
e. Be eaepy e
aea, a eepaypa yxa yp
aea ce eepayp pyae
yxa (pe epe ac).

Note on moisture condensation


Moisture may condense when you bring your
camcorder from a cold place into a warm place
(or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder
in a hot place as follows:
You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into
a place warmed up by a heating device
You bring your camcorder from an airconditioned car or room into a hot place outside
You use your camcorder after a squall or a
shower
You use your camcorder in a high temperature
and humidity place

eca a

Additional Information

None of the functions except cassette ejection will


work. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,
and leave it for about one hour with the cassette
compartment open. Your camcorder can be used
again if the % indicator does not appear when
the power is turned on again.

pa yxy
a aapa ep
pecpc

195

Maintenance information and


precautions

pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc

Maintenance information

pa yxy a
aapa

Cleaning the video head


To ensure normal recording and clear pictures,
clean the video heads. The video head may be
dirty when:
mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback
picture.
playback pictures do not move.
playback pictures do not appear.
the x indicator and CLEANING
CASSETTE message appear one after another
or the x indicator flashes on the LCD screen or
in the viewfinder.

ca e
ecee pa ac e
pae ceye epec c
e. Be, ,
ape, ec:
a cp pae c
ex a a.
cpe paee e aec.
cpe paee e ec a
pae.
a pae caee epee
c ap x cee
CLEANING CASSETTE, ae ap x.
Ec y ex a [a] [b] ce
e eee 10 cey c
ce acce Sony DVM-12CLD (e
paaec). pepe paee , ec
cae e pe e ycpae,
pe cy.

If the above problem, [a] or [b] occurs, clean the


video heads for 10 seconds with the Sony DVM12CLD cleaning cassette (not supplied). Check
the picture and if the above problem persists,
repeat cleaning.

[a]

[b]

or/

Cleaning the LCD screen

ca paa

If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty,


we recommend using a LCD Cleaning Kit (not
supplied) to clean the LCD screen.

Ec a pae c ea
, peeyec cac
ce ap (e
paaec) c .

Charging the vanadium-lithium


battery in your camcorder
Your camcorder is supplied with a vanadiumlithium battery installed so as to retain the date
and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the
POWER switch. The vanadium-lithium battery is
always charged as long as you are using your
camcorder. The battery, however, will get
discharged gradually if you do not use your
camcorder. It will be completely discharged in
about four months if you do not use your
camcorder at all. Even if the vanadium-lithium
battery is not charged, it will not affect the
camcorder operation. To retain the date and time,
etc., charge the battery if the battery is discharged.
Charging the vanadium-lithium battery:
Connect your camcorder to mains using the AC
power adaptor supplied with your camcorder,
and leave your camcorder with the POWER
switch turned off for more than 24 hours.
Or install the fully charged battery pack in your
camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the
POWER switch turned off for more than 24
196 hours.

apa aae-e
aape Bae eaepe
Bae eaepe paaec aaeea aapea, pa cxpae a
ay pe .. eac yca
epeae POWER. Baae-ea
aapea apaec cea, a B
cyee c eaepy. Oa aapea
ye cee papac, ec B e
cyee eaepy. Ec B cce e
yee ac eaep, aapea
paec c papc pep epe
epe eca. ae ec aae-ea
aapea e apea, e e a pay
eaep. cxpae a a
pee ceye ap aapey, ec a
papea.
apa aae-e aape:
cee eaepy ce c
cee aaepa epee a,
paae Bae eaepe, cae
eaepy c e ae ee, e
a 24 aca.
e ycae c ape
aape Bay eaepy cae
ee c e ae ee, e a 24
aca.

Maintenance information and


precautions
Precautions

pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc
Mep pecpc
cyaa eaep

Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack)


or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).
For DC or AC operation, use the accessories
recommended in this operating instructions.
If any solid object or liquid get inside the
casing, unplug your camcorder and have it
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it
any further.
Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be
particularly careful of the lens.
Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG)
when you are not using your camcorder.
Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for
example, and operate it. Doing so might cause
heat to build up inside.
Keep your camcorder away from strong
magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.
Do not touch the LCD screen with your fingers
or a sharp-pointed object.
If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a
residual image may appear on the LCD screen.
This is not a malfunction.
While using your camcorder, the back of the
LCD screen may heat up. This is not a
malfunction.

cyapye eaepy 7,2 B


(aape ) 8,4 B (cee aaep
epee a).
acaec cyaa eaep
c epee a, cye
paec, peeyee a
cpy cyaa.
Ec yp pyca a a-y ep
pee c, e eaepy
epe aee ee cyaae pepe ee
y epa Sony.
He ycae py pae c eaep
exaecx yap. ye ce
cp c e.
a eaepa e cyec, ycae
epeae POWER ee OFF (CHG).
He apaae eaepy, apep,
ee, e cyapye ee a
cc. B p cyae e p
ee eepayp yp eaep.
epe Bay eaepy ae cx
ax e e epae ee
exaec pa.
He pacaec pay aa
cp peea.
p cyaa Bae eaep
x ece, a pae e
c cae paee. Oa
e ec ecpac.
p cyaa Bae eaep, a
cpa paa e apeac. Oa
e ec ecpac.

On handling tapes

Camcorder care
Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the
power, operate the CAMERA and VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
sections and play back a tape for about three
minutes when your camcorder is not to be used
for a long time.
Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust.
If there are fingerprints on the lens, remove
them with a soft cloth.
Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth,
or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild
detergent solution. Do not use any type of
solvent which may damage the finish.
Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When
you use your camcorder on a sandy beach or in
a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust.
Sand or dust may cause your camcorder to
malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction
cannot be repaired.

Oce pae c ea
He cae ax pee aee
epc a ae cpe acce.
epc cyc peee a
e, a ae peee
a cyc eeca a
ac a ee.
He pae pexpaey py e
e pacaec ee.
He pacaec ca e ycae x
pee. yae ce ca
c a.

x a eaep
a eaepa eee e pee
e cyec, ae accey
epec ae ae, ae aepe
paa pee CAMERA VCR (DCRTRV20E)/PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E), a
cpeee acce pep a p y.
ce e c c
yae . Ec ec ea ae
a ee, yae x c a.
ce pyc eaep c
cyx a a, cea ce
ca pacp e cpeca. He
cye ae pacpe, pe y
pe pe.
He ycae aa eca eaepy.
Ec B cyee eaepy a eca
e a- ece,
pexpae aapa eca . ec
y pec ecpac
aapaa, pa a e
eycpa.

Do not insert anything into the small holes on


the rear of the cassette. These holes are used to
sense the type and thickness of the tape and if
the recording tab is in or out.
Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the
tape.
Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To
remove dust, clean the terminals with a soft
cloth.

Additional Information

Camcorder operation

197

Maintenance information and


precautions

pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc

AC power adaptor

Cee aaep epee a

Unplug the unit from the mains when you are


not using the unit for a long time. To disconnect
the mains lead, pull it out by the plug. Never
pull the mains lead itself.
Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or
if the unit has been dropped or damaged.
Do not bend the mains lead forcibly, or place a
heavy object on it. This will damage the cord
and may cause fire or electrical shock.
Prevent metallic objects from coming into
contact with the metal parts of the connecting
section. If this happens, a short may occur and
the unit may be damaged.
Always keep metal contacts clean.
Do not disassemble the unit.
Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the
unit.
While the unit is in use, particularly during
charging, keep it away from AM receivers and
video equipment. AM receivers and video
equipment disturb AM reception and video
operation.
The unit becomes warm during use. This is not
a malfunction.
Do not place the unit in locations that are:
Extremely hot or cold
Dusty or dirty
Very humid
Vibrating

Ocee aapa epec ce,


ec e cyec ee pe.
cee cee ypa e
e a pae. Ha e e a ca yp.
He cyapye aapa c pee
yp, ec aapa ya
pee.
C e epeae cee p e
cae a e ee pee.
pe p e pec apy
pae epec .
Hae eaece pee e
cpacac c eaec aa
cee ac. Ec cyc,
e p pe aae,
aapa e pee.
Bcea epae eaece
a ce.
He papae aapa.
He epae aapa exaec
pa e pe e.
p ca aapaa, ce
pe ap, epe e ae
pe AM-paea
eaapayp. pe AMpaea eaapaypa apya
AM-pape pay eaapayp.
B pecce cyaa aapa apeaec.
Oa e ec ecpac.
He paeae aapa ecax:
Oe apx xx
x px
Oe ax
epex pa

Battery pack
Use only the specified charger or video
equipment with the charging function.
To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not
allow metal objects to come into contact with
the battery terminals.
Keep the battery pack away from fire.
Never expose the battery pack to temperatures
above 60C (140F), such as in a car parked in
the sun or under direct sunlight.
Keep the battery pack dry.
Do not expose the battery pack to any
mechanical shock.
Do not disassemble nor modify the battery
pack.
Attach the battery pack to the video equipment
securely.
The battery pack is not resistant to water. Do
not wet the battery pack.
Unless you use the battery pack for a long
period, store the battery pack after you charge
it fully and use it completely once a year.
Store the battery pack in a cool, dry place.

198

aape
cye peeyee ape
ycpc eaapaypy c ye
ap.
pepae ecac cya -a
p aa e ycae
cpce eaecx pee c
ca aape a.
He epe aape .
He epae aape ec
eepayp ce 60C (140F), e cae
e, apep, ae, papa
ce ece p
ce ya.
epae aape cyx e.
He epae aape ec
ax- exaecx yap.
He papae e ee
aape .
ppee aape
eaapaype .
aape e ec
epae. He epae
aape ec a.
Ec B ee pe e cyee
aape , c ape e
xpae e. aape pa
ex c papa.
pae aape cyx pxa
ece.

Maintenance information and


precautions

pa yxy a aapa
ep pecpc

Notes on dry batteries

To avoid possible damage from battery leakage


or corrosion, observe the following:
Be sure to insert the batteries with the +
polarities matched to the + marks.
Dry batteries are not rechargeable.
Do not use a combination of new and old
batteries.
Do not use different types of batteries.
Current flows from batteries when you are not
using them for a long time.
Do not use leaking batteries.

B eae pee
eaep cece ye ypee
eeca aapee pp cae
ceyee:
p ycae aapee cae
pay pc + cec
c ea + .
Cyxe aape e epeapa.
He cye e aape ece c
cap.
He cye aape pa a.
Ec aape ee pe e
cyc, cee
papac.
He cye aape, pe
e.

If batteries are leaking


Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment
carefully before replacing the batteries.
If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.
If the liquid get into your eyes, wash your eyes
with a lot of water and then consult a doctor.

B cyae e ax- pe,


e eaepy ca
a paec a
cepc ep Sony.

Additional Information

If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder


and contact your nearest Sony dealer.

Ec pa yea ypee
eeca aapee
epe e, a ae aape,
ae ppe ca c
cee aapee.
B cyae aa c a y,
ce ee .
B cyae aa c aa,
pe aa ec ,
ce e paec pay.

199

English

Specifications
Video camera
recorder
System
Video recording system
2 rotary heads
Helical scanning system
Audio recording system
Rotary heads, PCM system
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)
Video signal
PAL colour, CCIR standards
Usable cassette
Mini DV cassette with the
mark printed
Tape speed
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/s
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/s
Recording/playback time (using
cassette DVM60)
SP: 1 hour
LP: 1.5 hours
Fastforward/rewind time (using
cassette DVM60)
Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds
Viewfinder
Electric viewfinder (colour)
Image device
1/4 type CCD (Charge Coupled
Device)
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
Approx. 680,000 pixels
(Effective: Approx. 340,000 pixels)
DCR-TRV20E:
Approx. 1,070,000 pixels
(Effective (still): 1,000,000 pixels)
(Effective (moving): 690,000 pixels)
Lens
Carl Zeiss
Combined power zoom lens
Filter diameter
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E: 30 mm
(1 3/16 in.)
DCR-TRV20E: 37 mm (1 1/2 in.)
10 (Optical), 40 (Digital)

200

Focal length
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
3.3 - 33 mm (5/32 - 1 5/16 in.)
DCR-TRV20E:
4.2 - 42 mm (3/16 - 1 11/16 in.)
When converted to a 35 mm still
camera
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
Camera/Memory mode:
42 - 420 mm (1 11/16 - 16 5/8 in.)
DCR-TRV20E:
Camera mode:
48 - 480 mm (1 15/16 - 19 in.)
Memory mode:
40 - 400 mm (1 5/8 - 15 3/4 in.)
Colour temperature
Auto, HOLD (Hold), nIndoor
(3200K), Outdoor (5800K)
Minimum illumination
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E: 5 lux (F 1.7)
DCR-TRV20E: 7 lux (F 1.8)
0 lux (in the NightShot mode)*
* Objects unable to be seen due to
the dark can be shot with infrared
lighting.
Input/Output connectors
S video output (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E)
S video input/output (DCRTRV20E)
4-pin mini DIN
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
unbalanced
Chrominance signal: 0.3 Vp-p,
75 ohms, unbalanced
Audio/Video output
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
Audio/Video input/output (DCRTRV20E)
AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
unbalanced, sync negative
327 mV, (at output impedance
more than 47 kilohms)
Output impedance with less than
2.2 kilohms/Stereo minijack
( 3.5mm)
Input impedance more than 47
kilohms
DV output (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
DV input/output (DCR-TRV20E)
4-pin connector
Headphone jack
Stereo minijack ( 3.5 mm)
(LANC) jack (DCR-TRV6E)
DIGITAL I/O/ (LANC) jack (DCRTRV11E/TRV20E)
Special Mini-minijack ( 2.5 mm)

MIC jack
Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance
with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output
impedance 6.8 kilohms ( 3.5 mm)
Stereo type
LCD screen
Picture
DCR-TRV6E:
2.5 inches measured diagonally
50.3 37.4 mm (2 1 1/2 in.)
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E:
3.5 inches measured diagonally
72.4 50.4 mm (2 7/8 2 in.)
Total dot number
DCR-TRV6E: 200,640 (880 228)
DCR-TRV11E: 184,800 (840 220)
DCR-TRV20E: 246,400 (1120 220)
General
Power requirements
7.2 V (battery pack)
8.4 V (AC power adaptor)
Average power consumption
(when using the battery pack)
During camera recording using
LCD
DCR-TRV6E: 3.4 W
DCR-TRV11E: 3.5 W
DCR-TRV20E: 4.4 W
Viewfinder
DCR-TRV6E: 2.5 W
DCR-TRV11E: 2.6 W
DCR-TRV20E: 3.6 W
Operating temperature
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C (4 F to +140 F)
Dimensions (Approx.)
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
71 93 163 mm
(2 7/8 3 3/4 6 1/2 in.) (w/h/d)
DCR-TRV20E:
71 93 170 mm
(2 7/8 3 3/4 6 3/4 in.) (w/h/d)
Mass (approx.)
DCR-TRV6E: 580 g (1 lb 4 oz)
DCR-TRV11E: 620 g (1 lb 5 oz)
DCR-TRV20E: 680 g (1 lb 7 oz)
main unit only
DCR-TRV6E: 680 g (1 lb 7 oz)
DCR-TRV11E: 720 g (1 lb 9 oz)
DCR-TRV20E: 780 g (1lb 11 oz)
including the battery pack,
NP-FM50, cassette DVM60, lens cap
and shoulder strap
Supplied accessories
See page 5.

AC power adaptor
Power requirements
100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
23 W
Output voltage
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the
operating mode
Operating temperature
0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)
Storage temperature
20 C to +60 C (4 F to +140 F)
Dimensions (approx.)
125 39 62 mm
(5 1 9/16 2 1/2 in. ) (w/h/d)
excluding projecting parts
Mass (approx.)
280 g (9.8 oz)
excluding mains lead
Cord length (approx.)
Mains lead: 2 m (6.6 feet)
Connecting cord: 1.6 m (5.2 feet)

Design and specifications are


subject to change without notice.

ea pa

Output voltage
DC 7.2 V
Capacity
8.5 Wh (1180m Ah)
Dimensions (approx.)
38.2 20.5 55.6 mm
(1 9/16 13/16 2 1/4 in.)
(w/h/d)
Mass (approx.)
76 g (2.7 oz)
Type
Lithium ion

Memory
Flash memory
4MB: MSA-4A
Operating voltage
2.7-3.6V
Power consumption
Approx. 45mA in the operating
mode
Approx. 130A in the standby
mode
Dimensions (approx.)
50 2.8 21.5 mm
(2 1/8 7/8 in.) (w/h/d)
Mass (approx.)
4 g (0.14 oz)

Additional Information

Battery pack

Memory Stick
(DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E only)

201

Pycc

Texece xapaepc
Beaepa
Ccea

202

Ccea eac
2 paaec
Ccea a
exaec paep
Ccea ayac
Bpaaec , ccea
M
cpea: 12
(c ac 32 , cepe 1,
cepe 2), 16
(C ac 48 , cepe)
Beca
e ca PAL, caap
MP
cyee acce
acce DV c ea
a
Cpc e
SP: p. 18,81 /c
LP: p. 12,56 /c
Bpe ac/
cpee (p
ca acce
DVM60)
SP: 1 ac
LP: 1,5 aca
Bpe ycpe epe
epe/aa (p
ca acce
DVM60)
p. 2 . 30 cey
Bcae
epec cae
(e)
ppae pae
1/4- (pp c
ap c)
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
p. 680,000 ee
pae
(Pae: p. 340,000
ee pae)
DCR-TRV20E:
p. 1,070,000 e
(Paee (ee):
1,000,000 e)
(Pae: ( e): 690,000
e)
Oe

epca e c
epp pacapa
aep pa
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E: 30
DCR-TRV20E: 37
10-pa (ec),
40-pa (p)

yce pacce
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
3.3 - 33
DCR-TRV20E:
4.2 - 42
p pepaa 35-
aepy
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
Pe aepa/a:
42 - 420
DCR-TRV20E:
Pe aepa:
48 - 480
Pe a:
40 - 400
ea eepaypa
Apeypae, HOLD
(pa), nB ee
(3200K), Ha ye (5800K)
Maa ceec
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E: 5 ( 1.7)
DCR-TRV20E: 7 ( 1.8)
0 ( pee ce)*
* Cey e, ex
ee, c
papac
cee.
Pae xx/xx
ca
Bex S (DCR-TRV6E/
TRV11E)
Bex/ex S
(DCR-TRV20E)
4-pe -e DIN
Ca pc: 1 B a y, 75
O, ecep
Ca ec: 0,3 B a y,
75 O, ecep
Bx caa ay/e
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
Ay/Be x/x
(DCR-TRV20E)
Mpae AB, paax caa
1 B, 75 O, ecep,
cxppa
pae c
327 B, (p x
cpe
ee 47 O)
e xe cpee
eee 2,2 O/
cepeece -e
( 3.5)
Bxe e cpee
ee 47 O

Bex DV
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E)
Bx/x DV (DCR-TRV20E)
4-p pae
e x ee
Cepeece -e
( 3.5 )
e
(LANC) (DCR-TRV6E)
e DIGITAL I/O/ (LANC)
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
Ceaoe -eo
( 2.5 )
e MIC
M-e, 0,388 B e
e cpee p 2,5 3,0 B c a, e
xe cpee 6,8 O
( 3.5 )
Cepeec
pa
paee
DCR-TRV6E:
2,5 a aa
50.3 37.4
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E:
3,5 a aa
72.4 50.4
Oee ec ee
pae
DCR-TRV6E: 200,640 (880 228)
DCR-TRV11E: 184,800 (840 220)
DCR-TRV20E: 246,400 (1120 220)
Oe xapaepc
Tpea a
7,2 B (aape )
8,4 B (cee aaep
epee a)
Cpe peea
c
(p ca
aape a)
B pe ac eaep c

DCR-TRV6E: 3.4 W
DCR-TRV11E: 3.5 W
DCR-TRV20E: 4.4 W
Bcae
DCR-TRV6E: 2.5 W
DCR-TRV11E: 2.6 W
DCR-TRV20E: 3.6 W
Paa eepaypa
O 0 C 40 C
Teepaypa xpae
O -20 C +60 C
Paep (p.)
DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E:
71 93 163 (//)
DCR-TRV20E:
71 93 170 (//)

Bec (p.)
DCR-TRV6E: 580
DCR-TRV11E: 620
DCR-TRV20E: 680
caa eaepa
DCR-TRV6E: 680
DCR-TRV11E: 720
DCR-TRV20E: 780
c aape ,
NP-FM50, acceo DVM60
ee pee
paaee paec
C. cp. 5.

Cee aaep
epee a

Bxe apee
7,2 B c. a
Mc
8.5 B
Paep (p.)
38.2 20.5 55.6 (//)
Bec (p.)
76
T
e-

Memory Stick
( e
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
a
-a
4 M: MSA-4A
Paee apee
2.7-3.6B
peea c
p. 45 A pae pee
p. 130 A pee
a
Paep (p.)
50 2.8 21.5 (//)
Bec (p.)
4

ea pa

cpy exece
xapaepc y
ec e
peape yee.

Additional Information

Tpea a
100 - 240 B epee a,
50/60
peea c
23 B
Bxe apee
Bx c. a: 8,4 B, 1,5 A
pae pee
Paa eepaypa
0 C 40 C
( 32 F 104 F)
Teepaypa xpae
-20 C +60 C
( -4 F +140 F)
Paep (p.)
125 39 62 (//), e
a cyae ac
Bec (p.)
280 ,
e a cee yp
a ypa (p.)
Cee yp: 2
Cee yp: 1.6

aape

203

Quick Reference

pa cpa

Identifying the parts


and controls

Oaee ace
peyp

Camcorder

Beaepa

2
3
4
5
6
1 Viewfinder lens adjustment lever (p. 25)
2 Display window (p. 214)
3 OPEN button (p. 21)
4 PROGRAM AE button (p. 61)
5 EXPOSURE button (p. 64)
6 SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 49, 116)

1 Pa peyp ea
cae (. 25)
2 O ce (cp. 214)
3 a OPEN (cp. 21)
4 a PROGRAM AE (cp. 61)
5 a EXPOSURE (cp. 64)
6 c SEL/PUSH EXEC (cp. 49, 116)

This mark indicates that this


product is a genuine accessory for
Sony video products.
When purchasing Sony video
products, Sony recommends that
you purchase accessories with this
GENUINE VIDEO
ACCESSORIES mark.

204

aa ea aae,
ee ec
paec
eaapayp Sony. p
ye eaapayp Sony
peeyec ppea
ee paec Sony
c e GENUINE VIDEO
ACCESSORIES.

Identifying the parts and controls

I
J
Q
K
R

L
M

7 EDITSEARCH (cp. 34)

8 Intelligent accessory shoe (p. 104, 211)

8 epae caex
paece (cp. 104, 211)

9 Focus ring (p. 65)


0 FOCUS switch (p. 65)
qa Camera recording lamp (p. 21)
qs Microphone
qd Infrared rays emitter (p. 31, 43, 87)

9 o ycp (cp. 65)


0 epeae FOCUS (cp. 65)
qa aa ac eaep (cp. 21)
qs Mp

qf Remote sensor

qd yae papacx ye
(cp. 31, 43, 87)

qg SUPER LASER LINK button (p. 43)

qf a ca ypae

qh Viewfinder (p. 25)

qg a SUPER LASER LINK (cp. 43)

qj FADER button (p. 53)

qh Bcae (cp. 25)

qk VOLUME buttons (p. 36)

qj a FADER (cp. 53)

ql LCD BRIGHT buttons (p. 24)

qk VOLUME (cp. 36)

w; BACK LIGHT button (p. 30)

ql LCD BRIGHT (cp. 24)

pa cpa

7 EDITSEARCH buttons (p. 34)

Quick Reference

w; a BACK LIGHT (cp. 30)

205

Identifying the parts and controls

wg

wh
wj

206

wa MEMORY PLAY button


(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 154)

wa a MEMORY PLAY (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 154)

ws MEMORY +/ buttons
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 146, 154)

ws MEMORY +/ ( e
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 146, 154)

wd LCD screen (p. 23)

wd pa (cp. 23)

wf Speaker

wf a

wg MEMORY INDEX button


(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 156)

wg a MEMORY INDEX (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 156)

wh MEMORY DELETE button


(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 166)

wh a MEMORY DELETE (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 166)

wj MEMORY MIX button


(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p.144)

wj a MEMORY MIX ( e
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 144)

Identifying the parts and controls

wk

es
ed
wl

ef

e;

eg

ea

wk DISPLAY button (p. 37)

wk a DISPLAY (cp. 37)

wl DIGITAL EFFECT button (p. 58, 68)

wl a DIGITAL EFFECT (cp. 58, 68)


e; a PB ZOOM (cp. 70, 160)

ea RESET button (p. 180)

ea a RESET (cp. 190)

es END SEARCH button (p. 34)

es a END SEARCH (cp. 34)

ed MENU button (p. 49, 116)

ed a MENU (cp. 49, 116)

ef DATA CODE button (p. 37)

ef a DATA CODE (cp. 37)

eg TITLE button (p. 108, 112)

eg a TITLE (cp. 108, 112)

eh

SELFTIMER button (p. 33, 47, 143)

eh

pa cpa

e; PB ZOOM button (p. 70, 160)

Quick Reference

eh

a SELFTIMER (cp. 33, 47, 143)

207

Identifying the parts and controls

r;

ej
ek

ra
rs

el

rd

208

ej PHOTO button (p. 45, 138)

ej a PHOTO (cp. 45, 138)

ek BATT release button (p. 13)

ek a c aape (cp. 13)

el Hooks for shoulder strap

el p ee pe

r; Power zoom lever (p. 27)

r; Pa pa pacapa (cp. 27)

ra NIGHTSHOT switch (p. 31)

ra epeae NIGHTSHOT (cp. 31)

rs SUPER NIGHTSHOT button (p. 31)

rs a SUPER NIGHTSHOT (cp. 31)

rd MEMORY RELEASE button


(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 133)

rd a MEMORY RELEASE
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
(cp. 133)

Attaching the shoulder strap


Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your
camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder strap.

ppeee ee pe
ppee ee pee, paae
Bae eaepe, pa
ee pe.

Identifying the parts and controls

rl

rf

rg
rh
rj
t;
rk

ta
rf aa pae ( e
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 133)

rg MEMORY OPEN button


(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 133)

rg a MEMORY OPEN (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 133)

rh LOCK switch (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)


(p. 21)
rj START/STOP button (p. 21)

rj a START/STOP (cp. 21)


rk epeae POWER (cp. 21)

rl Video control buttons (p. 36)


x STOP (stop)
m REW (rewind)
N PLAY (playback)
M FF (fastforward)
X PAUSE (pause)
z REC (record) (DCR-TRV20E only)
The control buttons light up when you set the
POWER switch to VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/
PLAYER (DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).

rl ep (cp. 36)
x STOP (caa)
m REW (ycpea epea aa)
N PLAY (cpeee)
M FF (ycpea epea epe)
X PAUSE (aya)
z REC (ac) ( e
DCR-TRV20E)
ypae ceac, ec
epeae POWER ycae
ee VCR (DCR-TRV20E)/PLAYER
(DCR-TRV6E/TRV11E).

t; Lens Cap (p. 21)

t; pa ea (cp. 21)

ta Grip strap

ta Pee axaa

Fastening the grip strap

ppee pee axaa

Fasten the grip strap firmly.

Hae ppee pee axaa.

pa cpa

rk POWER switch (p. 21)

rh epeae LOCK (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 21)

Quick Reference

rf Access lamp (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)


(p. 133)

209

Identifying the parts and controls

ts
td

th
tj
tk
tl

tf
tg
ts AUDIO/VIDEO jack (p. 41, 80, 97)
td i (headphones) jack
When you use headphones, the speaker on
your camcorder is silent.
tf OPEN/EJECT lever (p. 20)
tg Tripod receptacle
Make sure that the length of the tripod screw
is less than 6.5 mm (9/32 inch). Otherwise,
you cannot attach the tripod securely and the
screw may damage your camcorder.
th DV IN/OUT jack (DCR-TRV20E only) (p. 82,
96, 99)
DV OUT jack (DCR-TRV6E/11E only)
This i.LINK mark is a trademark of Sony
Corporation and indicates that this product is
in agreement with IEEE 1394-1995
specifications and their revisions.
The DV IN/OUT jack is i.LINK compatible.
tj DC IN jack (p. 14)
tk DIGITAL I/O/ (LANC) control jack
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 157)
(LANC) control jack (DCR-TRV6E only)
LANC stands for Local Application Control
Bus System. The control jack is used for
controlling the tape transport of video
equipment and other peripherals connected to
the video equipment. This jack has the same
function as the jack indicated as CONTROL L
or REMOTE.
tl MIC jack (PLUG IN POWER)
Connect an external microphone
(not supplied). This jack also accepts
a plug-in-power microphone.
y; S VIDEO jack (p. 41, 80, 97)

210

y;
ts e AUDIO/VIDEO (cp. 41, 80, 97)
td i e (e ee)
Ec B cyee e ee,
a a Bae eaepe
aec.
tf Pa OPEN/EJECT (cp. 20)
tg e aa
eec, a a aa
eee 6,5 . B p cyae B e
cee ae ppe a, a
e pe Bay eaepy.
th e DV IN/OUT ( e
DCR-TRV20E) (cp. 82, 96, 99)
e DV OUT ( e
DCR-TRV6E/11E)
a i.LINK ec p ap
ppa Sony yaae a ,
py cecye exec
yc caap IEEE 1394-1995 x
e.
e DV IN/OUT epae
epeay ca caapy i.LINK.
tj e DC IN (cp. 14)
tk e ypae DIGITAL I/O/
(LANC) ( e DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E) (cp. 157)
e ypae LANC (
e DCR-TRV6E)
LANC aae ccey aaa
ec ypae. e ypae
cyec p a
epeeee e eaapayp
epepx ycpc, pe
e e. ae e ee
ay e y, a pae,
aee CONTROL L REMOTE.
tl e MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
cee ee pa
(e paaec). e ae
e p c
aee a.
y; S e VIDEO (cp. 41, 80, 97)

Identifying the parts and controls

Note on the Carl Zeiss lens


Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss
lens which can reproduce a fine image.
The lens for your camcorder was developed
jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and Sony
Corporation. It adopts the MTF* measurement
system for video camera and offers a quality
as the Carl Zeiss lens.

peae ey ap ec
Baa eaepa caea e
p ap ec, p e
ya caecee
pae.
Oe Bae eaep
papaa cec ae ap
ec (epa) ppae Sony. B
e ce e ccea epe MTF*
eaep, aae a e
c aec, a ce e
a ap ec.

* MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation


Transfer Function/Factor.
The value number indicates the amount of
light of a subject penetrating into the lens.

pa cpa

pea epae
caex paece
epae caex
paece ae ae a
caee paec, ae
a ecea p.
epae caex
paece cee c
epeaee POWER, e
a a aaee a
epae ae. pe cee
pc cpy cyaa
caex paece.
B epaee caex
paece eec
pexpaee ycpc
ae ca ycae
paec. cee
paec ae ee
ae ypa, a ae ae .
c paec cae ,
a ae ae paec
e ee.

Quick Reference

Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe


The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power
to optional accessories such as a video light or
microphone.
The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the
POWER switch, allowing you to turn the power
supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the
operating instructions of the accessory for
further information.
The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety
device for fixing the installed accessory
securely. To connect an accessory, press down
and push it to the end, and then tighten the
screw.
To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and
then press down and pull out the accessory.

* MTF - cpaee y/
ap epea y.
aee yaae ec cea
ea, pae epe e.

211

Identifying the parts and controls


Remote Commander


y ca
ypae

The buttons that have the same name on the


Remote Commander as on your camcorder
function identically to the buttons on your
camcorder.

ya ca ypae,
pe e ae aea c
a a eaepe, ypy
e.

RMT-809

1
2
4
qf
5

RMT-811/RMT-812

9
qa

qs
qd
0
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

qa
qs
qd
qf

1 PHOTO button (p. 45, 138)

1 a PHOTO (cp. 45, 138)

2 DISPLAY button (p. 37)

2 a DISPLAY (cp. 37)

3 Memory control buttons


PLAY/INDEX/+/- button (p. 146, 154)

3 ypae a
PLAY/INDEX/+/- (cp. 146, 154)

4 SEARCH MODE button (p. 73, 75, 77)

4 a SEARCH MODE (cp. 73, 75, 77)

5 Video control buttons (p. 36)

5 ep (cp. 36)

6 REC button (RMT-812 only) (p. 98, 100, 103)

6 a REC
( e RMT-812) (cp. 98, 100,
103)

7 MARK button (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)


(p. 93, 98, 100, 103)

9 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 72)

7 a MARK
( e DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E) (cp. 93, 98, 100, 103)

0 DATA CODE button (p. 37)

8 a AUDIO DUB (cp. 106)

qa Transmitter
Point toward the remote sensor to control
your camcorder after turning on your
camcorder.

9 a ZERO SET MEMORY (cp. 72)

8 AUDIO DUB button (p. 106)

0 a DATA CODE (cp. 37)

qs START/STOP button (p. 21)

qa epea
ypae eaep apae
y a a ce ee e.

qd Power zoom button (p. 27)

qs a START/STOP (cp. 21)

qf ./> buttons (p. 73, 75, 77)

qd a pa pacapa
(cp. 27)
qf ./> (cp. 73, 75, 77)

212

9
0

Identifying the parts and controls

To prepare the Remote Commander

ya
ca ypae

Insert 2 R6 (Size AA) batteries by matching the +


and polarities on the batteries to
the + marks inside the battery compartment.

pa cpa

pea yy ca
ypae
epe ca a a
pacc cx c cea,
apep, px cex ye
a pepa. B p cyae
cae ypaee e e
eca.
aa eaepa paae pee
ya ca ypae VTR 2.
Pe ya ca ypae
1, 2 3 cyc a
eaep pyx ea
p Sony eae epa
pa. Ec B cyee py
ea p Sony, paa
pee VTR 2, peeye Ba
e pe ya ca
ypae ap ca
a eaa ep ya.

Quick Reference

Notes on the Remote Commander


Point the remote sensor away from strong light
sources such as direct sunlight or overhead
lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander
may not function properly.
Your camcorder works in the commander mode
VTR 2. Commander modes
1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your
camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid
remote control misoperation. If you use another
Sony VCR in the Commander mode VTR 2, we
recommend changing the commander mode or
covering the sensor of the VCR with black
paper.

Bcae 2 aape R6 (paepa AA),


ca pc + c ca +
yp cea aapee.

213

Identifying the parts and controls

Operation indicators
A
B
C
D
E
F

G
H

Pae ap
M
N
O
P
Q

1 2 0 min

ST I LL
1 6 : 9W I DE
NEG . ART

STBY
+

AUTO
5 0 AWB
F11

0:1 2:3 4
1 2 min
Z ERO S E T
M E MO R Y
END
SEARCH

16B I T
100 - 0001

I
J
K
L
1 Cassette memory indicator (p. 29, 171)
2 Remaining battery time indicator (p. 29)
3 Zoom indicator (p. 27) /Exposure indicator
(p. 64) /Data file name indicator
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 131)
4 Digital effect indicator (p. 58) /MEMORY
MIX indicator (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)
(p. 144)/FADER indicator (p. 53)
5 16:9WIDE indicator (p. 51)
6 Picture effect indicator (p. 56)
7 Data code indicator (p. 37)
8 LCD bright indicator (p. 24)/Volume
indicator (p. 36)/Date indicator (p. 29)
9 PROGRAM AE indicator (p. 61)
0 Backlight indicator (p. 30)
qa SteadyShot off indicator (p. 117)
qs Manual focus/Infinity indicator (p. 65)
qd Recording mode indicator (p. 29)
qf STBY/REC indicator (p. 21)/Video control
mode indicator (p. 36)/Image size indicator
(DCR-TRV20E only) (p. 136)/Image quality
mode indicator (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
only) (p. 134)

214

R
S
T
U

wj
Z

V
W
X
Y
1 ap acce a (cp. 29, 171)
2 ap caec apa
aape a (cp. 29)
3 ap paca (cp. 27)/
ap c (cp. 64)/
ap aa aa ax
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
(cp. 131)
4 ap p ea (cp. 58)
/ap MEMORY MIX (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 144)/
ap FADER (cp. 53)
5 ap pea 16:9WIDE (cp. 51)
6 ap ea pae (cp. 56)
7 ap a ax (cp. 37)
8 ap pc (cp. 24)/
ap pc (cp. 36)/
ap a (cp. 29)
9 ap PROGRAM AE (cp. 61)
0 ap ae ce (cp. 30)
qa ap e yc
ce (cp. 123)
qs ap py ycp/
ecec (cp. 65)
qd ap pea ac (cp. 29)
qf ap STBY/REC (cp. 21)/ap
pea ep (cp. 36)/
ap paepa pae (
e DCR-TRV20E) (cp. 136)/
ap pea aeca
pae ( e
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 134)

Identifying the parts and controls

qg NIGHTSHOT indicator (p. 31)

qg ap NIGHTSHOT (cp. 31)

qh Warning indicators (p. 183)

qh peypeae ap (cp. 192)

qj Tape counter indicator (p. 72)/Time code


indicator (p. 29)/Self-diagnosis indicator
(p. 182)/Tape photo indicator (p. 45)/
Memory photo indicator (DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E only) (P. 138)/Image number
indicator (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p.
155)

qj ap cea e (cp. 72)/


ap a pee (cp. 29)/
ap y caac
(cp. 191)/ap ce (cp.
45)/ap c a
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
(cp. 138)/ap epa
pae ( e
DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E) (cp. 155)

qk Remaining tape indicator (p. 29)/Memory


playback indicator (DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E
only) (p. 154)

w; END SEARCH indicator (p. 34)

qk ap caec e (cp. 29)/


ap cpee a
( e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)
(cp. 154)

wa Audio mode indicator (p. 120)

ql ap ZERO SET MEMORY (cp. 72)

ws Data file name indicator (DCR-TRV11E/


TRV20E only)(p. 144) This indicator appears
when the MEMORY MIX functions work./
Time indicator (p. 29)

w; ap END SEARCH (cp. 34)

ql ZERO SET MEMORY indicator (p. 72)

wf Video flash ready indicator


This indicator appears when you use the
video flash light (not supplied).

wh Remaining battery time indicator (p. 14)/


Tape counter (p. 22)/Memory counter (DCRTRV11E/TRV20E only)/Time code indicator
(p. 29)
wj FULL charge indicator (p. 14)

wd ap epep pea
ax ( e DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E) (cp. 140)
wf ap c ec
ap ec p
ca ec (e
paaec).

pa cpa

wg Self-timer indicator (p. 33)

ws ap aa aa ax
( e DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E)(cp. 144) ap
ec pe pa y
MEMORY MIX./ap pee
(cp. 29)

Quick Reference

wd Continuous mode indicator (DCR-TRV11E/


TRV20E only) (p. 140)

wa ap aaec pea
(cp. 126)

wg ap aepa caayca
(cp. 33)
wh ap caec apa
aape a (cp. 14)/Ce
e (cp. 22)/Ce a (
e DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E)/
ap a pee (cp. 29)
wj ap ap FULL (cp. 14)

215

English

Quick Function Guide


Functions to adjust exposure (in the recording mode)
In a dark place
In insufficient light
In dark environments such as sunset, fireworks, or
general night views
Shooting backlit subjects
In spotlight, such as at the theatre or a formal event
In strong light or reflected light, such as at a beach in
midsummer or on a ski slope

NIGHTSHOT (p. 31)


Low lux mode (p. 61)
Sunset & moon mode (p. 61)
BACK LIGHT (p. 30)
Spotlight mode (p. 61)
Beach & ski mode (p. 61)

Functions to give images more impact (in the recording mode)


Smooth transition between scenes
Taking a still picture
Digital processing of images
Creating a soft background for subjects
Superimposing a title

FADER (p. 53)


TAPE PHOTO (p. 45)/MEMORY PHOTO
(p. 138)
PICTURE EFFECT (p. 56)/DIGITAL
EFFECT (p. 58)
Soft portrait mode (p. 61)
TITLE (p. 108)

Functions to give a natural appearance to your recordings


(in the recording mode)
Preventing deterioration of picture quality in digital
zoom
Focusing manually
Shooting distant subjects
Recording fast-moving subjects

D ZOOM [MENU] (p. 116)


Manual focus (p. 65)
Landscape mode (p. 61)
Sports lesson mode (p. 61)

Functions to use in editing (in the recording mode)


Watching the picture on a wide-screen TV
Viewing images using a personal computer
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only)

Wide mode (p. 51)


Memory Stick (p. 131)

Functions to use after recording (in the playback mode)


Digital processing of recorded images
Displaying the date/time or various settings when you
recorded
Quickly locating a desired scene
Searching for scenes having a title
Searching for scenes recorded in the photo mode
Scanning scenes recorded in the photo mode
Playing back on monaural sound or sub sound
Playing back the picture on a TV without connecting a
cord
Enlarging still images

216

PICTURE EFFECT (p. 67)/DIGITAL


EFFECT (p. 68)
Data code (p. 37)
Zero set memory (p. 72)
Title search (p. 73)
Photo search (p. 77)
Photo scan (p. 79)
HiFi SOUND [MENU] (p. 116)
SUPER LASER LINK (p. 43)
PB ZOOM (p. 70)/Memory PB ZOOM
(DCR-TRV11E/TRV20E only) (p. 160)

Ac

pae pyc y
y peyp c ( pee ac)
B e ece
p eca cee
B ex pyax ycx, apep, ax
ca, eepep e e
Cea e c ae ce
p pep cee, apep, eape
a a epe
p c cee pae cee, apep,
a e paap ea a ce ce

Ha cea (cp. 31)


Pe ceec (cp. 61)
Pe axa ca y (cp. 61)
BACK LIGHT (cp. 30)
Pe pep cee
(cp. 61)
pe (cp. 61)

y pa e aca pae
( pee ac)
a epex ey aca a
Cea e pae
pa paa pae
Cae a e
Haee pa

FADER (cp. 53)


TAPE PHOTO (cp. 45)/MEMORY
PHOTO (cp. 138)
e pae (cp. 56)/
DIGITAL EFFECT (cp. 58)
M ppe pe (cp. 61)
TITLE (cp. 108)

y pa ac ecece a
D ZOOM [MENU] (cp. 116)
Pya ycpa (cp. 65)
aa pe (cp. 61)
Pe cpx cca (cp. 61)

pcp pae a ppa


eepe
pcp pae c epca
epa ( e DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E)

ppa pe (cp. 51)


Memory Stick (cp. 131)

y ca ce ac ( pee cpee)
pa paa acax pae
Opaee pe ac a/pee
pax yca
cp c yx
c a c p
c , acax pee
Capae , acax pee
Bcpeee ec
cae ya
Bcpeee pae a eepe e
cee ypa
eee ex pae

pa cpa

y ca p ae ( pee ac)

Quick Reference

( pee ac)
pepaee yxye aeca pae
p p paca
ycpa pyy
Cea yaex e
ac cp yxc e

e pae (cp. 67)/


DIGITAL EFFECT (cp. 68)
o ax (cp. 37)
a ye e (cp. 72)
c pa (cp. 73)
c (cp. 77)
capae (cp. 79)
HiFi SOUND [MENU] (cp. 116)
SUPER LASER LINK (cp. 43)
PB ZOOM (cp. 70)/a PB ZOOM
( e DCR-TRV11E/
TRV20E) (cp. 160)

217

English

Index
A, B

I, J, K, L

AC power adaptor ..................... 14


Adjusting viewfinder ................ 25
Audio dubbing ......................... 104
AUDIO MIX ............................. 118
Audio mode .............................. 120
AUTO SHTR ............................. 117
A/V connecting cable
......................... 41, 80, 90, 97, 151
BACK LIGHT ............................. 30
Battery pack ................................ 13
Beep ........................................... 122
BOUNCE ..................................... 53

i.LINK ........................................ 174


Image protection ...................... 164
Image quality mode ................ 134
INDEX (Multiple) display ...... 140
InfoLITHIUM battery ........... 18
Infrared rays emitter ..... 31, 43, 48
Insert editing ............................ 101
Intelligent accessory shoe ....... 211
JPEG ........................................... 131
Labelling a cassette .................. 114
LANC ........................................ 210
LCD screen ................................. 23
LUMINANCEKEY .................... 58

RANDOM DOT ......................... 53


Rec review .................................. 35
Recording time ........................... 16
Remaining battery time
indicator ................................... 29
Remaining tape indicator ......... 29
Remote commander ................ 212
Remote control jack (LANC)
................................................. 210
Remote sensor .......................... 203
RESET ........................................ 181

M, N
Main sound ............................... 172
Manual focus .............................. 65
Memory chromakey ................ 144
Memory luminancekey ........... 144
Memory Stick ........................... 131
Menu settings ........................... 116
Memory overlap ...................... 144
Memory PB ZOOM ................. 160
M.FADER .................................... 53
Mirror mode ............................... 23
Moisture condensation ........... 195
MONOTONE ............................. 53
Mosaic fader ............................... 53
NIGHTSHOT ............................. 31
Normal charge ........................... 14

S video jack ..................... 41, 48, 80


Self-diagnosis display ............. 182
Self-timer recording .................. 33
SEL/PUSH EXEC dial ............ 116
Serial port adaptor ................... 157
Shoulder strap .......................... 207
Signal convert function ............. 96
Skip scan ..................................... 39
Slide show ................................. 162
Slow playback ............................ 39
SLOW SHUTTER ....................... 58
STEADYSHOT ......................... 117
Stereo tape ................................ 172
STILL ........................................... 58
Sub sound ................................. 172
SUPER LASER LINK ................ 43
SUPER NIGHTSHOT ................ 31

O, P, Q

T, U, V

OLD MOVIE ............................... 58


Operation indicators ............... 214
OVERLAP ........................... 53, 114
PAL system ............................... 194
PB ZOOM ................................... 70
Photo scan ................................... 79
Photo search ............................... 77
Photo recording ......................... 45
PICTURE EFFECT ..................... 56
Picture search ............................. 39
Playback pause ........................... 39
Power sources
(the mains) ............................... 19
(car battery) ............................. 19
(battery pack) .......................... 13
Power zoom ................................ 27
Print mark ................................. 169
PROGRAM AE .......................... 61

Tape counter ......................... 29, 72


Telephoto .................................... 27
Time code .................................... 29
Title .................................... 108, 112
Title search .................................. 73
TRAIL .......................................... 58
Transition .................................... 22
TV colour systems ................... 194

C, D
Camera chromakey ................. 144
Cassette memory ............... 11, 171
Charging battery ........................ 14
Charging vanadium-lithium
battery .................................... 196
Clock set .................................... 129
Connection
(viewing on TV) ...................... 41
(dubbing a tape) ....... 80, 97, 151
Continuous ............................... 140
Data code .................................... 37
Date search ................................. 75
DEMO ........................................ 121
DIGITAL EFFECT ............... 58, 68
DIGITAL I/O/ (LANC) ...... 157
Digital program editing ............ 84
DISPLAY ..................................... 37
Dual sound track tape ............. 172
Dubbing a tape ........................... 80
DV connecting cable .... 82, 99, 151

E
EDITSEARCH ............................ 34
END SEARCH ...................... 34, 40
Exposure ..................................... 65
External microphone (not
supplied) ................................ 210

F, G, H
FADER ........................................ 53
Fade in/out ................................. 53
FLASH MOTION ....................... 58
FOCUS ......................................... 65
Format ....................................... 119
Full charge .................................. 14
Grip strap .................................. 209
Heads ......................................... 195
Headphone jack ....................... 208
HiFi SOUND ............................ 118

218

W, X, Y, Z
Warning indicators .................. 183
White balance ............................. 49
Wide-angle ................................. 27
Wide mode ................................. 51
WIPE ............................................ 53
WORLD TIME .......................... 122
Write-protect tab ........................ 20
Zero set memory ........................ 72
Zoom ........................................... 27

Pycc

Aa yaae
, , ,
Aaep ceae
pa ................................. 157
Ayepeac ................ 104
Aype ........................ 126
aac e ....................... 49
aape .................. 13
aape
InfoLITHIUM ...................... 18
Be p
(e x e) .... 210
Be ...................... 195
Bpe ac ......................... 16
Bcae y ......... 89
e x
ee ........................ 210
e ca
ypae (LANC) .......... 212
e DIGITAL I/O/
(LANC) ............................... 157
e S VIDEO ............... 38, 71

, , ,

yae papacx
ye ....................... 31, 43, 48
ap caec
e ................................... 29
ap RANDOM DOT .... 53
ap WIPE ................... 53
eca
(apa) ............... 140
c a
(epeca ce) ......... 19
(a
ayyp) ...................... 19
(aape ) ............. 13
accea a ......... 11, 171
a ec
eaep .................... 144
a ec
a ............................... 144
a pc a ...... 144
a
caac .............. 191
ax ............................ 37
pee .......................... 29
eca a ............. 195

Hacpa ac ................. 129


Haee pae
..................................... 53, 114
Haee c
a ............................... 144
Hepep pe .......... 140
Ha cea ...................... 31
Hpaa apa ............ 14
Oepa e/
cee ...................... 53
Oc y ..................... 172
Ocaeec pe pa
aape, ap ........... 29

, ,
a PB ZOOM ................ 160
aya cpee ....... 39
ea a .................... 169
a apa .................... 14
c a ............................ 75
c pae .............. 39
pcp ac ................... 35
ee pe ................. 208
a ye e ...... 72
epeac e ................. 80
epex ................................. 22
c e pa ....... 39
c pa ........................... 73
peypeae
ap ....................... 192
y ca
ypae ....................... 212
Pae ap .......... 214
Pee axaa ............ 209
Peypa
cae ..................... 25
Pe aeca
pae ..................... 134
Pe yye
ce ................................. 31
Pya ycpa ............ 65
p a ppa
............................................. 84

,
Cee aaep epee
a ...................................... 14
Cee ae ay/
e ......... 41, 80, 90, 97, 151
Ceee
(pcp a pae
eepa) ........................ 41
(epeac e)
.............................. 80, 97, 151
Cee ae
DV .......................... 82, 99, 151

-
ca e .................. 116
eep Maa ................... 53
pa ................................. 125
c .............................. 77
cea ........................... 45
capae ................ 79
y pepaa
caa ................................ 96
y PB ZOOM ................ 70
y WORLD TIME ....... 128
pya cea ...... 27
ppa pe ...... 51
e pae .......... 56
c ............................ 65
pa ............................ 23

A, B, C, D
AUDIO MIX ........................... 124
AUTO SHTR ......................... 123
BACK LIGHT ........................... 30
BOUNCE ................................. 53
DEMO ................................... 127
DIGITAL EFFECT ............. 58, 68
DISPLAY ................................. 37

E, F, G, H
EDITSEARCH ......................... 34
END SEARCH .................. 34, 40
FADER .................................... 53
FLASH MOTION ..................... 58
FOCUS ................................... 65
HiFi SOUND .......................... 124

pa cpa

, , ,

Cee ae
i.LINK .................................. 174
Ce e ................ 29, 72
Ccea PAL .......................... 95
Cce e
eee ..................... 194
Cape ..................... 58
Cepeeca
ea ................................. 172
Tee ............................... 27
Tp .............................. 108, 125
Tpaca ....................... 27
Tpacap ....................... 27

Quick Reference

a ca
ypae ....................... 205
ecpa ca ....... 162
epae
caex
paece ............. 211
c SEL/PUSH EXEC ........ 116
aeee
cpeee ................ 39
ac aepy
caayca ........................ 33
apa aape ................... 14
apa aae-e
aape .............................. 196
aa pae .......... 164
epa pe ............... 23
yep ca .............. 128

ea c y
p .......................... 172
eec a
ac .................................. 20
Mappa acce .......... 114
Mee ap ................ 58
Ma ca .................. 101
M. y FADER ............... 53

I-O
JPEG ..................................... 131
LANC .................................... 210
LUMINANCEKEY .................... 58
Memory Stick ........................ 131
MONOTONE ........................... 53

P-Z
PROGRAM AE ....................... 61
RESET .................................. 190
SUPER LASER LINK .............. 43
STEADYSHOT ...................... 123
STILL ...................................... 58
TRAIL ...................................... 58

219

Sony Corporation

Printed in Japan